YFP 166: Why Negotiation is an Important Part of Your Financial Plan


Why Negotiation is an Important Part of Your Financial Plan

Tim Baker and Tim Ulbrich talk all things negotiation. They discuss what it is, where it can be used, why it’s important to your financial plan, the goals of negotiation and tips and strategies for different parts of the negotiation process.

Summary

Tim Baker joins Tim Ulbrich on this episode to dig into all things negotiation. Negotiation is the process of discovery and a way to advocate for yourself and what your needs are. Tim Baker explains that negotiation is an important part of your financial plan for many reasons. He explains that settling for a lower salary can have a significant impact on your present and future finances because you may accrue less in retirement savings and potentially other investments. However, negotiation doesn’t just lie in your salary. You can also negotiate benefits like flex scheduling, paid time off as well as potentially parental leave and professional development opportunities, among others.

Tim Baker shares that 99% of hiring managers are expecting new hires to negotiate and build their initial offer as such. Many don’t end up negotiating because they don’t want to risk the offer being revoked, but Tim says that the majority of the time you should present a counter offer.

Tim then digs into the stages of the negotiation process that include the interview, receiving an offer, presenting a counter offer and accepting the offer and position. He shares many strategies and tips for each stage as well as additional techniques to use throughout the process.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, welcome back to the show.

Tim Baker: Yeah, happy to be here. How’s it going, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: It’s going. Excited to talk negotiation, something we discuss a lot in presentations, a lot I know that you discuss with clients as a part of the financial plan, but we haven’t addressed it directly on the show before. So I’m excited that we get a chance to dig into this topic. And we know that negotiation can carry a lot of power and can be used across the board really in life, right? It could be negotiating terms for a new or existing job position, buying a car, buying a house, negotiating with your kids or spouse — kidding, not kidding as we’ll talk about here in a little bit. So we’re going to focus predominantly on salary negotiation, but really these techniques can be applied to many areas of the financial plan and really life as a whole. So Tim, I know that for you, negotiation is a key piece of the financial plan. And you and our CFPs over at YFP talk about negotiation in the context of financial planning, which I would say is probably not the norm of the financial planning industry and services. So let’s start with this: Why is negotiation such an important piece of the financial plan?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think if we look at YFP’s mission, YFP’s mission is to empower pharmacists to achieve financial freedom. So I think the building blocks of that really is kind of what we do day-in and day-out with clients at YFP Planning. And what I typically, or the way that we typically approach a financial plan is we really want to help the client grow and protect their income, which is the lifeblood of the financial plan. Without income, nothing moves. But we know that probably more importantly than that is grow and protect the balance sheet, the net worth, which means increasing assets efficiently and decreasing liabilities efficiently and ultimately moving the net worth number in the right direction. So those are both quantitative things. But then qualitatively, we want to make sure that we’re keeping all the goals in mind, so grow and protect income and net worth while keep the goals in mind. So to me, that’s our jam, you know? So when I say — when somebody asks me a question like we do the Ask a YFP CFP, and I always say, “Well, it depends.” A lot of it really depends on those foundational, like where are we at with the balance sheet and where do we want to go? Meaning what are our goals? What’s our why? What’s the life plan, what’s a wealthy life for you and how can we support that with the financial plan? So to go back to your question, my belief is that the income is a big part of that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: And what I’ve found working with many, many pharmacists is sometimes pharmacists are not great at advocating for themselves. You know, most of the people that I talk to when we talk about salary negotiation, they’re like, eh, I’m just thankful I have a job, and I’m in agreement with that. But sometimes a little bit of a negotiation and having some of the skills that we’ll talk about today to better advocate for yourself is important. And a lot of this stuff is not necessarily just for salary. It can be for a lot of different things. But to me, what I saw as a need here, same thing like most financial planners don’t walk you through kind of home purchase and what that looks like because most financial planners are working with people in their 50s, 60s and 70s. So that was a need for a lot of our clients who were like, “Hey, Tim, I’m buying this house. I don’t really know where to start. So we provide some education and some recommendations and advice around that. Same thing with salary, I kept seeing like well, maybe I took the job too quickly or I didn’t advocate for myself, so that’s really where we want to provide some education and advice, again, to have a better position from an income perspective.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think it’s a great tool to have in your toolbag, you know. And I think as we’ll talk about here, the goal is not to be an expert negotiator. There’s lots of resources that are out there that can help with this and make it tangible and practical, one of which we’ll draw a lot of the information today, I know you talk with clients, a resource I love, “Never Split the Difference” by Chris Voss. But I’m glad you mentioned, you know, I think there is often a sentiment — I know I’ve felt in myself where you know what, I’m glad to have a position, I’m glad to be making a good income. But that can be true and you still can be a good person and you still can negotiate and advocate for yourself and the value you bring to the organization.

Tim Baker: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: So I hope folks will hear that and not necessarily think that negotiation is bad and as we’ll talk about here in a moment, I think really can have a significant impact when you think about it as it relates to earnings over your career and what those additional earnings could mean. So Tim, break it down for us. What is negotiation and really, digging further, why is it important?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so negotiation, you know, it’s really a process of discovery. It really shouldn’t be viewed as a battle. It’s really a process of discovery. It’s kind of that awkward conversation that you should be obligated to have because you know, if you don’t want to advocate for yourself professionally, who will? And maybe you have a good mentor or something like that, but to me, the negotiation, again, is really to discover what you want and kind of what your counterpart, which might be a boss or a hiring manager or something like that. And it’s really important because settling for a lower salary can have really major financial consequences, both immediately and down the road. And you typically — raises that you receive are typically based on a percentage of your salary, so hey, we’re going to give you a 3% raise this year, a 5% raise. If you start off with a salary that you’re not happy with, then obviously that’s a problem. Accrue less in retirement savings, so that TSP, that 401k, 403b, again, you typically are going to get some type of match in a lot of cases, and then you’re going to put a percentage. So again, that could potentially be lower. But it’s not just about salary. It can be — I think another mistake that sometimes people make is that they’ll say, oh wow, I was making $125,000 and I’m taking a job that’s paying me $135,000 and they take a major step back on some of the non-salary things like benefits and flex scheduling and time off and things like that. But you know, you really want to make sure that compensation package that you have, you know, you’re happy with. Because underpaid really can make you feel resentful over the long run. So you want to make sure that you’re, again, right now we’re filming in the midst of a pandemic and the economy and the job market is tough, but you still want to advocate for yourself and make sure you’re getting the best compensation package that you can.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and as we’ll talk about here in a little bit, I think if we frame this differently, then maybe our understanding, our preconceived beliefs — you know, you mentioned it’s not a battle, you know, I think the goal is that you’re trying to come to an agreement or an understanding. And as we’ll talk about here, many employers are likely expecting this. And that number, in terms of those that are expecting versus those that are actually engaging in the conversation from an employee standpoint is very different.

Tim Baker: Sure.

Tim Ulbrich: So I think that might help give us confidence to be able to initiate some of those, and we’ll talk about strategies to do that. I do want to give one example, though, Tim, real quick. You had mentioned obviously if somebody earns less and receive small raises or they accrue less in retirement savings, that can have a significant impact. And I went down the rabbit hole prepping for this episode of just looking at a quick example of this where you have two folks that let’s say they both start working at the age of 28, they retire at their 65, so same starting point, same retirement age. Let’s assume they get a 3% cost of living adjustment every year for their career just to keep it simple. The only difference here is that one starts at $100,000 and one starts at $105,000. So because of either what they asked for in negotiations, whatever be the case, one starts $5,000 greater than the other. And if you play this out, same starting age, same ending age, same cost of living adjustments, one starts at a higher point, when it’s all said and done, one individual has about $300,000 more of earnings than the other. And this of course does not include differences that you also have because of higher salary. If you had a match, that would increase, that would compound, that would grow. If you were to switch jobs, you’re at a better point to now negotiate for a higher salary, all other benefits that aren’t included. But the significance of the starting point I think is something to really look at those numbers that often where you start can inform where you’re going, not only from cost of living adjustments but also future employment, right? So we know that where you start if you get a 3% raise, it’s of course going to be based off that number. If you decide to leave that employer and you go to another one, what do they ask you? How much did you make? You’re using that number. So that starting point is so critical, and I hope that new practitioners might even find some confidence in that to be able to engage in discussions knowing how significant those numbers can be over a career. So in that one example, that starting point is a difference of about $300,000. Crazy, right, when you look at it over a long time period.

Tim Baker: Yeah, it’s nuts. And I’d play the devil’s advocate, on the other side of that is again, so much — just like everything else with the financial plan, you can’t look at it in a vacuum. We’ve had clients take a lot less money and really, it was because of the student loans and how that would affect their strategy in terms of forgiveness and things like that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: So it is multifactorial. It’s definitely something that it should really be examined. And I think, again, when you look at the overall context of the financial plan. But to your point, Tim, that starting salary and really how you negotiate throughout the course of your career is going to be utterly important. And again, what we say is — we kind of downplay the income because I think so much of what’s kind of taught is like, oh, six-figure salary, you’ll be OK. And that’s not true. But then it is true that it is the lifeblood of the financial plan, so I think if you have a plan and you’re intentional with what you’re doing, that’s where you can really start making moves with regard to your financial outlook.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I’m glad you said that about salary shouldn’t be looked at in a silo. I mean, just to further that point, you’ve alluded to it already, these numbers don’t matter if there’s other variables that are non-monetary that matter more. Right? Whether that be time off or satisfaction in the workplace, opportunities that you have, feelings of accomplishment. I mean, the whole list of things you can’t necessarily put a number to, I mean, I would argue if those are really important, you’ve got to weigh those against whatever this number would be. And there’s a certain point where the difference in money isn’t worth it if there’s other variables that are involved, which usually there are. Hopefully we can get both, right? Salary and non-salary items.

Tim Baker: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: So interesting stats about negotiation, I’ve heard you present before on this topic, but I’d like you to share with our audience in terms of managers that are expecting hires to negotiate versus those that do. Talk us through some of those as I think it will help us frame and maybe change our perception on employers expecting and our willingness to engage in these conversations.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I really need to cite this one. And I believe this first stat comes from SHRM, which is the Society for Human Resource Management. So I think this is like the biggest association for like HR and Human Resource personnel in the country. And the stat that I use is that 99% of hiring managers expect prospective hires to negotiate. So if you think about that, you know, the overwhelming majority expect you the prospective hire to negotiate. And they build their initial offers as such. So the example I give to clients is like, hey, we have a position that we could pay anywhere from $110,000 to $130,000, knowing that you know, Tim, if I’m offering this job to you, knowing that you’re probably going to negotiate with me. I’m going to offer it to you for $110,000 knowing that I have a little bit of wiggle room if you kind of come back with a counteroffer. But what a lot of my clients or people do that I talk with is they’ll just say, yes, I found a job, crappy job market, happy to get started, ready to get started. And they’re either overly enthusiastic to accept a job or they’re just afraid that a little bit of negotiation would hurt their outlook. So with that in mind is that you — the offers I think are built in a way that you should be negotiating and trying to, again, advocate for yourself.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and so if people are presenting positions often with a range in salary expecting negotiation, I hope that gives folks some confidence in OK, that’s probably expected and maybe shifts some of the perception away from, this whole thing could fall apart, which it could, right? At any given point in time, especially depending on the way you conduct yourself in that negotiation, which I think is really, really important to consider. But I think what we want to try to avoid, Tim, back to a comment you made earlier, is any resentment as well. I mean, if we think about this from a relationship standpoint, we want the employee to feel valued, and we want the employer to have a shot at retaining this individual long-term. So it’s a two-way relationship.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and it kind of comes up to where we were talking about what is the goal of negotiation. And really, the goal of negotiation is to come to some type of agreement.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: The problem with that is that people are involved in this. And we as people are emotional beings, so if we feel like that we’re treated unfairly or we don’t feel safe and secure or if we’re not in control of the conversation, our emotions can get the best of us. So that’s important. So again, there’s some techniques that you can utilize to kind of mitigate that. But you know, to allude to your point about negotiating, the fear to kind of potentially mess up the deal, there’s a stat that says 32% don’t negotiate because they’re too worried about losing the job offer.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: I know, Tim, like we can attest to this because with our growth at YFP, we’ve definitely done some human resourcing, to use that as a verb, and hiring and things like that of late. And I’ve got to say that the — I think that some of this can be unfounded just because there’s just so much blood, sweat and tears that goes into finding the right people to kind of surround yourself with and bring into an organization that to me, a little bit of back-and-forth is not going to ultimately lose the job. So typically most jobs, there’s — obviously there’s an application process, there’s interviews, there’s second interviews, there’s maybe on-site visits, there’s kind of looking at all the candidates and then extending offers. If you get to that offer stage, you’re pretty — they’ve identified as you’re the person that they want. So sometimes a little bit of back-and-forth is not going to derail any such deal. So it’s really, really important to understand that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and as the employer, I mean, we’ve all heard about the cost statistics around retention. So as an employer, when I find that person, I want to retain them. That’s my goal, right? I want to find good talent, I want to retain good talent. So I certainly don’t want somebody being resentful about the work that they’re doing, the pay that they have, and so I think if we can work some of that out before beginning, come to an agreement, it’s a good fit for us, good fit for them, I think it’s also going to help the benefit of hopefully the long-term relationship of that engagement. So it’s one thing to say we should be doing it. It’s another thing to say, well how do we actually do this? What are some tips and tricks for negotiation? So I thought it would be helpful if we could walk through some of the stages of negotiation. And through those stages, we can talk, as well as beyond that, what are some actual strategies to negotiation. Again, another shoutout to “Never Split the Difference” by Chris Voss. I think he does an awesome job of teaching these strategies in a way that really helps them come alive and are memorable.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, let’s talk about the first stage, the interview stage, and what are some strategies that those listening can take when it comes to negotiation in this stage.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so when I present these concepts to a client, I kind of said that the four stages of negotiation are fairly vanilla, you know? And the first one is that interview. So when you get that interview, what I say is typically you want to talk less, listen more and learn more. Typically, the person that is talking the most is not in control of the conversation. The one that’s listening and asking good questions is in control. And I kind of think back to some of our recent hires, and you know, the people that we identified as like top candidates, I’m like, man, their interviews went really well. And when I actually think back and slow down, it’s really — I think that they went really well because it’s really that person asking good questions and then me just talking. And that’s like the perception. So in that case, the candidate was asking us good questions and we’re like, yeah, this was a great interview because I like to hear myself talk or I just get really excited about what we’re doing at YFP. So I think if you can really focus on your counterpart, focus on the organization, whether it’s the hospital or whatever it is and learn and then really pivot to the value that you bring, I think that’s going to be most important. So you know, understanding what some of their pain points are, whether it’s retention or maybe some type of care issue or whatever that may be, you can kind of use that to your advantage as you’re kind of going through the different stages of negotiation. But the more that the other person talks, the better. I would say in the interview stage, one of the things that often comes up that can come up fairly soon is the question about salary. And you know, sometimes that is — it’s kind of like a time savings. So it’s a “Hey, Tim, what are you looking for in salary?” If you throw out a number that’s way too high, I’m not even going to waste my time. And what I tell clients is like you typically, you want to — and we’ll talk about anchoring. You really want to avoid throwing a number out for a variety of reasons. So one of the deflections you can use is, “Hey, I appreciate the question, but I’m really trying to figure out if I’d be a good fit for your organization. Let’s talk about salary when the time comes.” Or the other piece of it is it’s just you’re not in the business of offering yourself a job. And what I mean by that it’s their job to basically provide an offer. So, “Hey, my current employer doesn’t really allow me to kind of reveal that kind of information. What did you have in mind?” Or, “We know that pharmacy is a small business, and I’m sure your budget is reasonable. What did you have in mind?”

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: So at the end of the day, it’s their job to extend the offer, not you to kind of negotiate against yourself, which can happen. You know? I had — we signed on a client here at YFP Planning yesterday, and we were talking about negotiation. I think it had to do with a tax issue. And you know, he basically said this is what he was looking for and when he got into the organization, I think he saw the number that was budgeted for it, and it was a lot more. So again, if you can deflect that — and I tell a story, when I first got out of the Army, I kind of knew this. But when I first got out of the Army, I was interviewing for jobs. I was in an interview, and I deflected and I think the guy asked me again, and I deflected. I think he asked me for like — maybe he asked me four times, and I just wound up giving him a range that was like obnoxious, $100,000-200,000 or something like that. But to me, that — and the interview didn’t go well after that, but to me, it was more about clearing the slate instead of actually learning about me and seeing if I was a good fit. So you never want to lie if they ask about your current salary, you never want to lie. But you definitely want to deflect and move to things like OK, can I potentially be a good fit for your organization and then go from there.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think deflection takes practice, right?

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: I don’t think that comes natural to many of us.

Tim Baker: Absolutely. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: This reminds me, so talk less, listen more for any Hamilton folks we have out there, which is playing 24/7 in my house these days, the soundtrack. I’m not going to sing right now, but talk less, smile more, don’t let them know what you’re against or what you’re for. So I think that’s a good connection there to the interview stage. So next hopefully comes good news, company wants to hire you, makes an offer. So Tim, talk us through this stage. What should we be remembering when we actually have an offer on the table?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think you definitely want to be appreciative and thankful. Again, when a company gets to a point where they’re an extending you an offer, that’s huge. I remember when I got, again, my first offer out of the Army — because again, you didn’t really have a choice when you’re in the Army. Well, I guess you do have a choice, but they’re not like, “Here’s a written offer for your employment in this platoon somewhere in Iraq.” But I remember getting the first offer. I’m like, man, this is awesome. Shows your salary and the benefits and things like that, so you want to be appreciable and thankful — appreciative and thankful. You don’t want to be — you want to be excited but not too overexcited. So you don’t want to appear to be desperate. What I tell clients, I think the biggest piece here is make sure you get it in writing. And I have a story that I tell because if it’s not in writing, and what I essentially said is it didn’t happen. So again, using some personal experience here, first job out of the Army, I had negotiated basically an extra week of vacation because I didn’t want to take a step back in that regard. And I got the offer, and the extra week wasn’t there. So I talked to my future boss about it, and he said, “You know what, I don’t want to go back to headquarters and ruffle some feathers, so why don’t we just take care of that on site here?” And this was the job I had in Columbus, Ohio. And I said, “Yeah, OK, I don’t really want to ruffle feathers either.” The problem with that was when he got replaced, when he was terminated eight months later, that currency burned up fairly quickly. So I didn’t have that extra week of vacation. So if it’s not written down, it never happened. So you want to make sure that you get it in writing and really go over that written offer extensively. So some employers, they’ll extend an offer, and they want a decision right away. I would walk away from that. To me, a job change or something of that magnitude, I think it warrants a 24-, if not a minimum 48-hour timeframe for you to kind of mull it over. And this is typically where I come in and help clients because they’ll say, “Hey, Tim, I got this offer. What do you think?” And we go through it and we look at benefits and we look at the total compensation package and things like that. But you want to ask for a time, some time to review everything. And then definitely adhere to the agreed-upon deadline to basically provide an answer or a counteroffer or whatever the next step is for you.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think too, the advice to get it in writing helps buy you time, you know? I think you ask for it anyways. And I think the way you approach this conversation, you’re setting up the counteroffer, right? So the tone that you’re using, it’s not about being arrogant here, it’s not about acting like you’re not excited at all. I think you can strike that balance between you’re appreciative, you’re thankful, you’re continuing to assess if it’s a good fit for you and the organization, you want some time, you want it in writing, and you’re beginning to set the stage. And I think human behavior, right, says if something is either on the table or pulled away slightly, the other party wants it a little bit more, right?

Tim Baker: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: So if I’m the employer and I really want someone and I’m all excited about the offer and I’m hoping they’re going to say yes and they say, “Hey, I’m really thankful for the offer. I’m excited about what you guys are doing. I need some time to think about x, y and z,” or “I’m really thinking through x, y or z,” like all of a sudden, that makes me want them more. You know?

Tim Baker: Sure.

Tim Ulbrich: So I think there’s value in setting up what is that counteroffer. So talk to us about the counteroffer, Tim. Break it down and some strategies to think about in this portion.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, the counteroffer is I would say — the majority of the time, you should counter in some way. I think you’re expected to make a counter. And again, we kind of back that up with some stats. But you also, you need to know when not to kind of continue to go back to the negotiating table or when you’re asking or overasking. So I think research is going to be a good part of that. And what I tell clients is like, I can give them a very non-scientific — I’ve worked with so many pharmacists that I can kind of say, eh, that sounds low for this community pharmacy industry, or whatever, hospital, in this area. So your network, which could be someone like me, it could be colleagues, but it could also be things like Glass Door, Indeed, Salary.com. So you want to make sure that your offer, your counteroffer is backed up in some type of fact. And really, knowing how to maximize your leverage. So if you are — if you do receive more than one substantial offer from multiple employers, negotiating may be appropriate if the two positions are comparable. Or if you have tangible evidence that the salary is too low, you have a strong position to negotiate. So I had a client that knew that newly hired pharmacists were being paid more than she was, and she had the evidence to show that and basically they went back and did a nice adjustment. But again, I think as you go through — the way that we kind of do this with clients is we kind of go through the entire letter and the benefits. And I basically just highlight things and have questions about match or vacation time or salary, things like that. And then we start constructing it from there. So if you look at, again, the thing where most people will start is salary is you really want to give — when you counter, you really want to give a salary range rather than like a number. So what I say is, if you say, “Hey, Tim, I really want to make $100,000.” I kind of said it’s almost like the Big Bad Wolf that blows the house down. Like all of those zeros, there’s no substance to that. But if you said, “Hey, I really want to make $105,985,” the Journal of the Experimental Social Psychology says that using a precise number instead of a rounded number gives it a more potent anchor.

Tim Ulbrich: You’ve done your homework, right?

Tim Baker: Yeah. You know what you’re worth, you know what the position’s worth, it’s giving the appearance of research. So I kind of like — it’s kind of like the Zach Galfinakis meme that has all of the equations that are floating, it’s kind of like that. But the $100,000, you can just blow that house over. So and I think — so once you figure out that number, then you kind of want to range it. So they say if you give a range of a salary, then it opens up room for discussion and it shows the employer that you have flexibility. And it gives you some cushion in case you think that you’re asking for a little bit too high. So that’s going to be really, really important is to provide kind of precise numbers in a range. And oh, by the way, I want to be paid at the upper echelon of that.

Tim Ulbrich: So real quick on that, you mentioned before the concept of anchoring, and I want to spend some time here as you’re talking about a range. So dig into that further, what that means in terms of if I’m given a range, how does anchoring fit into that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so we kind of talk about this more when we kind of talk some of the tools and the behavior of negotiation. But the range — so when we talk about like anchoring, so anchoring is actually — it’s a bias. So anchoring bias describes the common tendency to give too much weight to the first number. So again, if I can invite the listener to imagine an equation, and the equation is 5x4x3x2x1. And that’s in your mind’s eye. And then you clear the slate, and now you imagine this equation: 1x2x3x4x5. Now, if I show the average person and I just flash that number up, the first number — the first equation that starts with 5 and the second equation that starts with 1, we know that those things equal the same thing. But in the first equation, we see the 5 first, so it creates this anchor, creates this belief in us that that number is actually higher.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, bigger, yeah.

Tim Baker: So the idea of anchoring is typically that that number that we see really is a — has a major influence, that first number is a major influence over where the negotiation goes. So you can kind of get into the whole idea of factoring your knowledge of the zone of possible agreement, which is often called ZOPA. So that’s the range of options that should be acceptable for both sides, and then kind of assessing your side of that and then your other party’s anchor in that. So there’s lots of things that kind of go into anchoring, but we did this recently with a client where I think they were offered somewhere in like the $110,000-112,000 area. And she’s like, I really want to get paid closer to like $117,000-118,000. So we basically in the counteroffer, we said, “Hey, thanks for the offer.” And we did something called an accusation, which we can talk about in a second. But “Thanks for the counteroffer, but I’m really looking to make between” — you know, I think we said something like $116,598 to all the way up into the $120,000s. And they actually brought her up to I think she was at $117,000 and change. So it actually brought her up closer to that $118,000. So using that range and kind of that range as a good anchoring position to help the negotiation.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, love it.

Tim Baker: There’s lots of different things that kind of go into anchoring in terms of extreme anchoring and a lot of that stuff that they talk about in the book, but again, that kind of goes back to that first number being thrown out there can be really, really integral. And again, when you couple that on top of hey, it’s their job to make you an offer, not the other way around, you have to really learn how to deflect that and know how to position yourself in those negotiations. But that’s really the counteroffer. And what I would say to kind of just wrap up the counteroffer is embrace the silence.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So Tim, there was silence there, and I’m like, I want to fill the void. And I do this with clients when we talk about mirroring and things like that. Like people are uncomfortable with silence. And what he talks about in the book, which I would 100% — this is really kind of a tip of the cap to Chris Voss and his book, which I love, I read probably at least once a year, where he talks about embracing the silence. We as people are conditioned to fill silences. So he talks about sometimes people will negotiate against themselves. If you just sit there and you say, “Uh huh. That’s interesting.” And then in the counter, just be pleasantly persistent on the non-salary terms, which can be both subjective and objective in terms of what you’re looking for in that position.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I want to make sure we don’t lose that. We’re talking a lot about salary, but again, as we mentioned at the beginning, really try to not only understand but fit what’s the value of those non-salary terms. So this could be everything from paid time off to obviously other benefits, whether that be health or retirement. This of course could be culture of the organization, whether it’s that specific site, the broader organization, opportunities for advancement.

Tim Baker: Mentorship. Yep. Mentorship.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes, yes.

Tim Baker: Yep, all of that.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think what you hear from folks — I know I’ve felt in my own personal career, with each year that goes on, I value salary, but salary means less and those other things mean more. And so as you’re looking at let’s just say two offers, as one example, let’s say they’re $5,000 apart. I’m not saying you give on salary, but how do you factor in these other variables.

Tim Baker: Yeah. Well, and I think too — and this is kind of next level with this, and I’ll give you some examples to cite it. I think another thing to potentially do when you are countering and when you’re shifting to some of maybe the non-salary stuff is really took a hard look at your potential employer or even your current employer if you’re an incumbent and you’re being reviewed and you’re just advocating for a better compensation, is look at the company’s mission and values. So the example I give is like when Shea and I got pregnant with Liam, she didn’t have a maternity leave benefit. And when she was being reviewed, we kind of invoked the company — and I think it’s like work-life balance and things like that — and we’re like, “Well, how can you say that and not back that up?” And again, we did it tactfully. Because you’re almost like negotiating against yourself, right? So when I present this to clients, the Spiderman meme where two Spidermans are pointing at each other, and she was able to negotiate a better, a maternity — and we look at us, and I give these, one of our values is encouraging growth and development. So if an employee says, hey, and they make a case that I really want to do this, it’s almost like we’re negotiating against ourselves. So I think if you can — one, I think it shows again the research and that you’re really interested and plugged into what the organization is doing — but then I think you’re leveraging the company against itself in some ways because you’re almost negotiating against well, yeah, we put these on the wall as something that we believe in. But we’re not going to support it or you know. Or at the very least, it plants a seed. And that’s what I say is sometimes with clients, we do strike out. It is hard to move the needle sometimes, but at least one, we’ve got an iteration under our belts where we are negotiation, and two, we’ve planted a seed with that employer — assuming that they took the job anyway — that says OK, these are things that are kind of important to me that we’re going to talk about again and things like that. So I think that’s huge.

Tim Ulbrich: Good stuff. So let’s talk about some tools that we can use for negotiation. And again, many of these are covered in more detail in the book and other resources, which we’ll link to in the show notes. I just want to hit on a few of these. Let’s talk about mirroring, accusation audits, and the importance of getting a “That’s right” while you’re in these conversations. And we’ll leave our listeners to dig deeper in some of the other areas. So talk to us about mirroring. What is it? And kind of give us the example and strategies of mirroring.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I would actually — Tim, what I would do is I would actually back up because I think probably one of the most important tools that are there I think is the calibrated question. So that’s one of the first things that he talks — and the reason, so what is a calibrated question? So a calibrated question is a question with really no fixed answer that gives the illusion of control. So the answer, however, is kind of constrained by that question. And you, the person that’s asking the question, has control of the conversation. So I give the example, when we moved into our house after we renovated it — so brand new house. I walk into my daughter’s room, I think she was 4 at the time, and she’s coloring on the wall in red crayons. And I’m from Jersey, so I say “crown” not “crayon.” And I look at her, and I say, “Olivia, why are you doing that?” And she sees how upset I am and mad and she just starts crying. And there’s no negotiation from there.

Tim Ulbrich: Negotiation over.

Tim Baker: There’s no exchange of information. So in an alternate reality, in an alternate reality, what I should have done is said, “Olivia, what caused you to do that?” So you’re basically blasting — instead of why — why is very accusatory — you’re like, the how and the what questions are good. So and of course she would say, “Well, Daddy, I ran out of paper, so the wall is the next best thing.” So the use of — and having these calibrated questions in your back pocket, I think again buys you some time and really I think frames the conversation with your counterpart well. So using words like “how” and “what” and avoiding things like “why,” “when,” “who.” So, “What about this works, doesn’t work for you?” “How can we make this better for us?” “How do you want to proceed?” “How can we solve this problem?” “What’s the biggest challenge you face?” These are all — “How does this look to you?” — these are all calibrated questions that again, as you’re kind of going back and forth, you can kind of lean on. So have good how and what questions. To kind of answer the question about mirroring, as you’re asking these questions, you’re mirroring your counterpart. So what mirroring, the scientific term is called isopraxism. But he defines and says “the real-life Jedi mind trick.” This causes vomiting of information is what he says. So you know, these are not the droids you’re looking for. So what you essentially is you repeat back the last 1-3 words or the critical words of your counterpart’s sentence, your counterpart’s sentence. So this is me mirroring myself. Yeah, well you want to repeat back because you want them to reveal more information. And you want to build rapport and have that curiosity of kind of what is the other person thinking so you can, again, come to an agreement. Come to an agreement? Yeah. So at the end of the day, the purpose — so this is mirroring. So I’ll show you a funny story. I practice this on my wife sometimes, who does not have a problem speaking. But sometimes the counterpart is —

Tim Ulbrich: She’s listening, by the way.

Tim Baker: Yeah, exactly. So I’ll probably be in trouble. But so I basically just for our conversation, just mirror back exactly what she’s saying. And you can do this physically. You can cross your legs or your arms or whatever that looks like. But what he talks about more is with words. And you know, I’ll basically just mirror back my wife, and she — at the end of the conversation, she’ll say something like, “Man, I feel like you really listened to me.” And I laugh about that because I’m just really repeating back. But if you think about it, I did. Because for you to be able to do that, you really do have to listen. So mirroring, again, if you’re just repeating back, you really start to uncover more of what your counterpart is thinking because often, like what comes out of our mouth the first or even second time is just smoke. So really uncovering that. One of the things he talks about is labeling where this is kind of the — it’s described as the method of validating one’s emotion by acknowledging it. So, “It seems like you’re really concerned about patient care. It seems like you’re really concerned about the organization’s retention of talent. So what you’re doing is that you’re using neutral statements that don’t involve the use of “I” or “we.” So it’s not necessarily accusatory. And then you are — same with the mirror. You really want to not step on your mirror. You want to not stop on your label and really invite the other person to say, “Yeah, I’m just really frustrated by this or that.” So labeling is really important to basically defuse the power, the negative emotion, and really allow you to remain neutral and kind of find out more about that. So that’s super important.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think with both of those, Tim, as you were talking, it connects well back to what we mentioned earlier of talk less, listen more.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Like you’re really getting more information out, right, from a situation that can be guarded, you know, people are trying to be guarded. And I think more information could lead hopefully to a more fruitful negotiation. What about the accusation audit?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the accusation audit, it’s one of my favorites, kind of similar with calibrated questions. I typically will tell clients, I’m like, “Hey, if you don’t learn anything from this, I would say have some calibrated questions in your back pocket and have a good accusation audit at the ready.” And we typically will use the accusation audit to kind of frame up a counteroffer. So it kind — so before I give you the example, the accusation audit is a technique that’s used to identify and label probably like the worst thing that your counterpart could say about it. So this is all the head trash that’s going on of why I don’t want to negotiate. It’s like, ah, they’re going to think that I’m overasking or I’m greedy, all those things that you’re thinking. So you’re really just pointing to the elephant in the room and you’re just trying to take this thing out and really let the air out of the room where a lot of people just get so nervous about this. So a good accusation audit is, “Hey, Tim, I really appreciate the offer of $100,000 to work with your organization. You’re probably going to think that I’m the greediest person on Planet Earth, but I was really looking for this to that.”

Tim Ulbrich: That’s a great line. Great line.

Tim Baker: Or, “You’re probably thinking that I’m asking way too much,” or, “You’re probably thinking that I’m way underqualified for this position, but here’s what I’m thinking.”

Tim Ulbrich: “No. No, no, no, Tim.”

Tim Baker: Right. So when someone says that to me, I’m like, “No. I don’t think that.” And what often happens — and again, clients have told me this — what often happens is that the person, the counterpart that they’re working with, like they’re recruited as — one person said, one client was like, “Oh, we’re going to find you more money. We’re going to figure it out.” So they like — so when someone says that to you, just think about how you would feel. “Oh, I don’t think that at all.” And then it just kind of lets the air out of the room. So you basically preface your counteroffer with like the worst thing they could say about you, and then they typically say, “That’s not true at all.”

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So I love the accusation audit. So simple, it’s kind of easy to remember. And I think it just lays I think the groundwork for just great conversation and hopefully a resolution.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. And then let’s wrap up with the goal of getting to a “That’s right.” I remember when I was listening to an interview with Chris Voss, this was a part that I heard and I thought, wow, that’s so powerful. If you can get — in the midst of this negotiation, if we can get to a “Yeah, that’s right,” the impact that could have on the impact.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so he kind of talks about it like kind of putting all of these different tools together. So it’s mirroring and labeling and kind of using I think what he calls minimal encouragement, “Uh huh,” “I see,” kind of paraphrasing what you hear from your counterpart. And then really wait for — it’s like, “Hey, did I get that right? Am I tracking?” And what you’re really looking for is a “That’s right.” He said that’s even better than a “Yes.” So one of the examples I give is when I speak with prospective clients, we’re talking about my student loans and my investment portfolio and I’m doing real budgeting, and I got a sold a life insurance policy that I think isn’t great for me. And so we go through all of these different parts of the financial plan. And I’m basically summarizing back what they’re saying. And I say, you know, at the end of it — so I’m summarizing 30 minutes of conversation. And I’m saying, “Did I get that right?” And they’re like, “Yeah, that’s right. You’re a great listener,” which I have to record for my wife sometimes because she doesn’t agree with me. So that’s what you’re looking for is “Yeah, that’s right.” This person has heard, message sent, heard, understand me. He says if you get a “You’re right,” so sometimes, again, I keep talking about my wife, I’m like, “Hey, we have to do a better job of saving for retirement,” and she’s like, “You’re right.” That’s really code for “Shut up and go away.” So it’s a “That’s right” really what we’re looking for.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome.

Tim Baker: So that’s very powerful.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s great stuff. And really, just a great overall summary of some tips within the negotiation process, the steps of the negotiation process, how it fits into the financial plan. We hope folks walk away with that and just a good reminder of our comprehensive financial planning services that we do at YFP Planning. This is a great example of when we say “comprehensive,” we mean it. So it’s not just investments, it’s not just student loans. It’s really every part of the financial plan. Anything that has a dollar sign on it, we want our clients to be in conversation and working with our financial planners to make sure we’re optimizing that and looking at all parts of one’s financial plan. And here, negotiation is a good example of that. So we’ve referenced lots of resources, main one we talked about here today was “Never Split the Difference” by Chris Voss. We will link to that in our show notes. And as a reminder to access the show notes, you can go to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/podcast, find this week’s episode, click on that and you’ll be able to access a transcription of the episode as well as the show notes and the resources. And don’t forget to join our Facebook group, the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, over 6,000 members strong, pharmacy professionals all across the country committed to helping one another on their own path and walk towards financial freedom. And last but not least, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the podcast, please leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to the show each and every week. Have a great rest of your day.

 

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 165: The Power of a Health Savings Account


The Power of a Health Savings Account

On this week’s podcast episode sponsored by HPSO, Tim Church joins Tim Ulbrich to talk about the ins and outs of a Health Savings Account, how an HSA fits into a financial plan and why he is choosing not to use his HSA to pay for medical expenses.

Summary

A health savings account (HSA) is an account that allows someone to contribute to it on a pre-tax basis to pay for qualified medical expenses. Unlike a FSA, any amount you contribute to it is yours and you aren’t forced to spend it within a year. If you have a high deductible health plan (HDHP) that has a deductible of $1,400 for an individual and $2,800 for a family, you can qualify for an HSA.

Tim Church explains that an HSA is not a health plan per se, but instead is a benefit that unlocks if you have the option to have a high deductible health plan. For 2020, HSA contribution limits are $3,550 for an individual and $7,100 for a family. A catch-up contribution of $1,000 is available for those that are over age 55.

Tim shares that HSAs have triple tax benefits: your contributions will lower your AGI, any contributions grow tax free, and distributions are tax free. The caveat with the last benefit is that if you’re under 65, these distributions must be used for qualified medical expenses. Otherise, you’ll pay a 20% penalty and will be taxed according to the marginal rate. After age 65, any distributions don’t have to be for qualified medical expenses, however you’ll have to pay income tax if they aren’t.

Tim explains that the most power in an HSA comes from this loophole: you don’t have to reimburse yourself in the same year you incur medical costs. This means that you’re able to allow your money to grow in the HSA and reimburse yourself for the medical expenses later on in life as long as you have the receipts and are keeping good records. Tim is essentially using his HSA like a 401(k) or TSP account, meaning he’s aggressively investing it in stock index funds and is using it like a retirement account instead of a savings account for medical expenses.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Church, two weeks in a row. Welcome back to the show.

Tim Church: Always good to be on. And you could also call this episode, “One of Tim Church’s Biggest Financial Mistakes Ever.”

Tim Ulbrich: I mean, how many episodes have we discussed the context of the topic as it relates to our mistakes? So here’s another one, which we will jump into in more detail. So today, we’re talking all about using an HSA as a savings vehicle. Now we talked a bit about HSAs on the podcast in the past, specifically Episode 019, How Does an HSA Fit Into a Financial Plan?, Episode 073, How to Determine the Priority of Investing, and most recently, on Episode 163, we briefly HSAs as it relates to Investing Beyond the 401k and 403b. But when I saw you wrote a blog post for the YFP blog on HSAs, I was reminded how powerful these accounts can be if you have access to them and knew we had to dig in more and dig in further on this topic. Now, for some of you listening, you may already saving in an HSA, some of you may have no idea what we’re talking about or this is the first time you’re hearing of it. And some of you may not have access to an HSA currently. And that’s OK as you may have this option available to you in the future. So Tim Church, let’s start with the basics: What the heck is an HSA?

Tim Church: So HSA stands for Health Savings Account. But the name itself is a little bit of a misnomer, as we’ll unpack, because you really can use it as more of an investing vehicle than necessarily just a simple savings account. But essentially, it allows you to contribute money on a pre-tax basis to pay for qualified medical expenses. These include costs for deductibles, copayments, coinsurance, and other expenses, generally not premiums, but a lot of different things that would fall under that as a qualified medical expense. And one of the biggest things — and I see this confusion come up a lot — is unlike an FSA or a Flexible Savings Account, any amount that you contribute into this is yours and you’re not forced to spend it every year. So it’s not a use-it-or-lose-it situation. Basically, those funds are there until you use them, even if you change jobs. It doesn’t matter. It’s going to follow with you, so it’s portable. So even if that’s the situation, it’s something that you’re going to continue to be able to utilize.

Tim Ulbrich: So key difference there, Tim: FSA/HSA. FSA you lose it if you don’t use, so you get some of the tax benefits, of course, that are associated with an FSA, but you’re always kind of worried about, OK, how much do I need? Am I going to need it? What if I don’t need it? HSA, totally different, right, in terms of if you decide to contribute or even max this out, you’re going to be able to continue to let those funds roll over, and we’ll talk about the growth opportunities that can come from those long term. So what is an HSA exactly? I mean, beyond what you just mentioned there, in terms of the setup of the accounts and how these worked and who ultimately has access to them.

Tim Church: So a Health Savings Account is not a health plan per se but rather a benefit that you unlock if you opt into a specific kind of health insurance plan called a high deductible health plan, or an HDHP. And these plans, as defined by the IRS, are those with deductibles of at least $1,400 for an individual and $2,800 for a family. Now that’s as per 2020. And these change over the years.

Tim Ulbrich: So we’ll link in the show notes to the IRS numbers if folks want to take a look at that further. But just to reiterate what you had said there, you essentially have to be enrolled in a high deductible health plan, so folks need to be thinking about not only can they contribute to the HSA if they’re eligible but also what’s their plan to be able to fund and bank the deductible monies in the event that they would need to use them throughout the year. So obviously coming into play here would be the emergency fund. So Tim, what from your experience — before we talk about contribution limits — from your experience, how widely available, in talking with many pharmacists, how widely available are these? And is this something that you’re seeing grow each and every year?

Tim Church: I think a lot of people have access to some form of a high deductible health plan. Not all of them are always that great. But I think that they are becoming more available. For me, I had this available for several years, even when I first started working, but just really didn’t understand what it was and how it worked and really was persuaded into a traditional PPO plan where everything was basically covered. If I had to go in for an appointment, covered medications, but the reality and the biggest thing that I didn’t understand is that with those traditional health plans, the premiums were much higher. And for somebody like myself who’s been fairly healthy, even though I’m not paying for things as they come up, they’re coming out of my paycheck, so I’m paying more for health-related expenses that I may not actually incur and didn’t incur for the first couple years when I was working. So that’s one of the biggest distinctions is that a high deductible plan is that you’re going to have to pay out of pocket for things that come up until you hit your deductible. But in general, your premiums are going to be lower.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think that’s the mistake you had referenced earlier, which I think thankfully is not a catastrophic one, right? But is worth noting for folks that may be in a similar position. If you’re healthy and otherwise don’t have a lot of healthcare expenses, obviously you never know what the future is going to hold, but if you’ve got a good emergency fund and there’s a stark difference between the premiums in more of a traditional plan versus a high deductible health plan, you could fund the deductible if something were to happen, well then obviously being able to go into the high deductible health plan not only unlocks perhaps the HSA but also is going to free up monies each and every month that you could allocate towards another part of your financial plan. So Tim, as we talk about HSAs here, what are we referring to as contribution limits? Because I think this is important as folks are considering OK, I know how much I can put in a 401k or 403b, we’ve talked about that many times on the show. I know what I can do in a Roth IRA or a traditional IRA. And here, if we’re going to begin to think about an HSA perhaps not only for health care expenses but as a long term savings account, it’s important we have an understanding of how much we can allocate towards that. So what’s the dollar amounts we’re looking at in 2020 for contributions?

Tim Church: So similar to an IRA or a 401k, these contribution limits change every couple years. For 2020, for a self high deductible health plan, you can contribute up to $3,550. And for a self plus one or family, that number is $7,100. And then there’s also a catch-up contribution of an additional $1,000 for those who are 55 and older.

Tim Ulbrich: And Tim, I want to go back. One thing you had mentioned when I asked you how widely available these are, you said I think lots of people may have access to them or certainly they’re growing in the number that are available. But you had mentioned not all of them may be good. And what were you referring to there? Is it in terms of the construct, design of the plan? The investment options that are available? What are you referring to there when you talked about the quality of the plan?

Tim Church: So Tim, I think there’s a couple things to consider when you’re looking at those plans. And one is what the deductible is set at because if it’s something that’s very, very high, that means you’re going to be paying a lot of money out of pocket until you reach that level. I’ll give you an example for my high deductible health plan. For my wife and myself, our deductible is set at $3,000, meaning that health expense that comes up, we have to essentially pay for it out of pocket until we reach that $3,000 mark. And then from that point until about $6,800, that’s when our insurance would kick in and we would have a copayment. But the one thing that we like about our plan is that you’re out-of-pocket expenses cannot exceed a certain level. And so the IRS sets that. For individuals, that’s $6,900 and $13,800 for in-network services. And that’s something to take into consideration as well because that may also be a benefit if you look at you’re never going to pay in a given year over a certain amount, that can be very helpful and beneficial. But if the deductible is set very, very high, that means anything that comes up, you’re on the hook for paying those. I think the other thing to look at is what are your typical needs that you’re going to have in a year for whatever medical conditions you have for medications? So you always have to look at what those additional coverage options are going to be versus what you would get in a traditional plan. And then I think the other thing to consider is when you are going to go with one of these high deductible health plans is picking a trustee or somebody who’s going to administer the HSA that is going to offer good investment options if that’s the route that you’re going to go. And when I say good investment options, meaning you have a diverse number of options available but then also ones that have low fees associated with those funds.

Tim Ulbrich: Love it. Great summary. And I think that aligns so well with what we talk about in terms of investing philosophy with our comprehensive financial planning services. You want to have options, right, where you can have choice but also be able to keep those fees low because as we’ve talked about on the show, we know how those fees can eat into your long term savings. So if you’re putting the money in, we want to do everything we can to minimize what’s ultimately eating away at those funds. So let’s dig into the HSA more. And to be honest, this is where not only does it get good, but this is also where I start getting a little bit of FOMO because I don’t have access to an HSA so every time we’ve talked about it, I mentioned previous episodes, I’m always like, man, I wish I could do this as it relates to my financial plan. And our listeners have likely heard us talk or perhaps somebody else talk before about how an HSA has what’s referred to as the triple tax benefit. So Tim, break that down for us. What is the triple tax benefit? And spend a little bit of time on each one of those areas.

Tim Church: Sure. So the first one is that contributions that you make towards a Health Savings Account will lower your Adjusted Gross Income. So I think as pharmacists, one of the things that’s sort of annoying is that there’s a number of deductions that are available, but I often find myself, well, you make too much money to qualify for that. You can’t deduct student loan interest because you make too much. You can’t deduct traditional IRA contributions. Well, that’s one of the biggest benefits of an HSA is that it doesn’t matter how much money you make, that anything you contribute will lower your Adjusted Gross Income, which I think is huge. So that’s one of the things that I would often tell my colleagues is that look beyond the difference in cost in what you’re going to pay with your health insurance is that you have to look for other ways to lower your tax liability. And even though this may not be huge, depending on if you’re an individual versus a family, it still can be a pretty significant amount. So that’s No. 1. No. 2 is that any contributions you make to the HSA, whether they’re in investment accounts or some bond account or a high yield savings account within that is that those contributions are growing tax-free, which is also a really big deal.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Tim Church: So like I said, whether you invest or you simply save them, they’re going to — if there’s growth on any of those accounts, you’re not on the hook for paying any taxes on those gains. And again, this is where it really comes down to how you want your HSA to function. So there’s a lot of people who are going to have medical expenses that they’re going to incur throughout the year, and they may want to use their HSA to pay for those expenses on a pre-tax basis, which is fine. I mean, there’s nothing wrong with that. You’re still getting the savings by paying for those expenses in that way or reimbursing yourself. But the power of the HSA is really where you can essentially pay out of pocket for health expenses that you may incur through the year and any of those contributions you make to an HSA, you can really look at it as almost an IRA. I know Dr. James Dowley at the White Coat Investor, he calls the HSA a “Stealth IRA” or an “IRA in disguise,” which really, that’s how it can function if that’s the way you want it to be. So that’s really powerful when you look at the ability to get growth and those investments in the HSA to grow over time and not have to worry about paying taxes on those gains.

Tim Ulbrich: And Tim, just real quick there, you’re essentially then looking at this, potentially, if you don’t have to use it for health care expenses, you’re looking at this as another long-term savings, another retirement account, correct?

Tim Church: Exactly. I mean, that’s exactly how ours is functioning right now. So I’ve had it set up now for three years since we changed our health insurance plan to a high deductible plan, and essentially everything we’ve been contributing in there I’ve just basically focused on that it’s an investment, it’s for retirement, and I’m not using any of the money in there.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Awesome. So No. 1 was contributions lower your Adjusted Gross Income, your AGI. No. 2 was your contributions can grow tax-free. So these two both sound awesome. So give us the third, the good news to wrap it up.

Tim Church: So the icing — yeah, the icing on the cake is that the distributions are tax-free. And I’ll put a little asterisk there.

Tim Ulbrich: Ding ding!

Tim Church: Because there’s a couple things with that. But in general, there is a way you can take money out and not have to pay any taxes on it. So first off, if you’re under 65, the distributions you make have to be for a qualified medical expense. Otherwise you have to pay a 20% penalty, and you get taxed according to your marginal rate. So definitely not something that you want to do. But after age 65, any distributions, they don’t have to be for a qualified medical expense, but you have to pay income taxes if they’re not. So the question then becomes, OK, well, what if I wait until I’m at the age but I still don’t want to pay taxes. Is there a way to get around this? And that’s really one of the loopholes, and this is completely legal and something to really consider, but when you’re taking distributions out of your HSA, let’s say this is 20 years down the road, 30 years down the road, you don’t have to reimburse yourself for medical expenses in the same year that you incurred them. Meaning let’s say today in 2020, I paid for medical expenses out of pocket. Well, 20-30 years from now, I can essentially say that I’m reimbursing myself for those expenses that were made several years before as long as you can prove that those are expenses that you paid for at some point in time, even if you get audited from the IRS, you’re still legally reimbursing yourself for those medical expenses. You’re just not doing it at the same time or same year that they were incurred.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that’s awesome. And that detail I think is really important, one that’s not talked enough about. And just to summarize, Tim, you did a great job succinctly, but the triple tax benefit, you know, folks think of — like we’ve talked before on the show — of the benefits of say like a traditional 401k or a 403b where you’re lowering Adjusted Gross Income today but ultimately you’re going to pay taxes in the future when you pull those monies out whereas the Roth IRA, what you’re putting in today you have already been taxed on and it’s growing tax-free, and then you pull it out tax-free. This really takes the best of both of those worlds. As you mentioned, ultimately what you are putting into your contributions lower your AGI, then your contributions grow tax-free, and then distributions are tax-free with the important stipulations that you mentioned. So talk to us about how you approach this, Tim, with your HSA. And again, this isn’t investment advice, of course. You know, we know every personal situation is different. But I think it would be helpful for our listeners to hear how do you approach your HSA in terms of aggressive, conservative, is this the place you’re really leaning in? Or are you looking at other places to do that and you’re a little bit more conservative here? How do you look at the investment strategy when it comes to your HSA?

Tim Church: Yeah, I mean, really it’s just similar to my 401k, which is through the government, it’s a TSP or a Thrift Savings Plan. That basically is very aggressive. So I don’t plan on using —

Tim Ulbrich: Full throttle, Tim Church-style, full throttle.

Tim Church: Take it to the limit. So it’s super aggressive into stock index funds because I’m not planning on using any of the money for several years down the road. And so it really is — the way I’m viewing this is I’m not touching it, I’m not going to use it for medical expenses today. Even if later down the road — you know, some people have said, let’s say you get to age 65 but you have so much money in your HSA that you haven’t even incurred that amount in medical expenses. Well, No. 1, that’s pretty awesome because that means I’ve been pretty healthy, my family’s been healthy during those years. But No. 2, the worst case scenario is you don’t pay a penalty but you pay income taxes on that. So it’s still a good option, even if that were the case. But yeah, it’s very aggressive. I’m viewing it as a retirement account, I’m not thinking about using it today or even in the next year. So it’s a very aggressive strategy. And like I said, that’s where it’s kind of a misnomer when you heard the word Health Savings Account because within my particular plan, there are several aggressive investments where you can put the majority of your money, all of your money if you want to, in a very aggressive portfolio in order to achieve greater gains several years down the road. And so for us, that’s the way we’re looking at that. And that’s why we’ve made that a huge priority after getting our matches at our work that that’s basically step No. 2 because of all of those tax benefits, this is very high in our priority with looking at those accounts.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and again, just to reinforce a point you made earlier to our listeners that just like we say, not every 401k or 403b is created equal in terms of your investment choices and fees, the same thing is true with HSAs. So you know, we’re obviously talking about this at a high level and globally talking about the tax benefits, but ultimately the construct of the high deductible health plan and where that deductible is set as well as your savings options within the HSA and the fees associated with those is going to make this — I would say on the spectrum of attractive because I think regardless, it’s still attractive, but more or less on that higher end of attractive. So Tim, you just alluded to this, but I don’t want to have anybody overlook it. You mentioned where this fits in priority-wise, but I want to dig into that a little bit further because I think we spend so much time talking about some of the, you know, more popular I guess you would say, 401k, 403b’s, Roth IRAs, brokerage accounts, etc. And HSAs sometimes gets lost in the mix of looking at this as an investing vehicle because of its name, Health Savings, as well as how it’s often used. But to reiterate what you just said there, we’ve talked about this before when we talked about priority of investing on Episode 073, where do you see this fitting in to one’s investing plan? Again, generally speaking.
Tim Church: Yeah, so this is really Step 2 for us after the match through our employer. Through my wife’s, she has a 401k match and I do as well. And really, after that, the HSA was Step No. 2. Just because of all those benefits that we outlined. And you know, for us, even when we were paying off student loans, we were getting our matches at work and we were going all-in on the HSA. And for us, we just didn’t want to miss out on those benefits of the years being able to contribute to that. So that’s something that we did, even in tandem while paying off student loans. Now I’ll say one thing that’s really cool is that if you are a person doing PSLF, so the Public Service Loan Forgiveness program or even a forgiveness after 20-25 years, that’s something that’s really cool beyond putting money in a traditional 401k, as we talked about, your contributions to an HSA are lowering your AGI, which are ultimately going to lower your student loan payments that you have to make. So again, you’re growing investments while you’re lowering your student loan payment. So it’s a really cool benefit for those who are pursuing forgiveness.

Tim Ulbrich: Love it. And Tim, one of the questions I saw come up recently in the YFP Facebook group, you know, I think somebody was asking essentially, hey, I would love to be able to take advantage of my employer’s HSA. I’m not currently in a high deductible health plan, but I’d like to make that switch so I can unlock that option. What are you seeing out there — and I know this could differ from one employer to the next for folks that might be listening here in August, it’s not open enrollment yet, do they have to wait if this option is available? Are there triggering events that may open up that door for somebody? What advice would you have for folks that are hearing this and saying, “I want to jump on this.”

Tim Church: Yeah, usually you can’t until it’s open enrollment unless there’s a qualified life event. Usually that’s birth of a child, marriage, what are some of the others? What are some of the other ones I’m missing, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: We actually just — you mentioned marriage, birth of a child are the big that I can think off the top of my head. Somebody in the group actually mentioned there after consulting with their HR, their employer had considered COVID-19 as an event that allowed them to make changes. So that may be some unique circumstance like that. But the two that you mentioned are the two biggest ones.

Tim Church: And the other thing I think that’s important to look at is a lot of people are very nervous about switching to a high deductible plan knowing that they’re going to have to shell out quite a bit of money in the event that they have medical expenses come up. So you briefly mentioned it, having that emergency fund is really important if you’re going to make that switch because you have to be ready to put out quite a bit of money until you reach that deductible. So I think that was really key. The other thing, what is a cool benefit is that a lot of health insurance plans is that when you enroll in a high deductible plan, they actually give you money every year that directly goes toward your contribution limit for your HSA. So for example, the plan that we have through the federal government, they actually give us $1,500 every year just for being in the plan towards the HSA, which is a huge benefit. So when you add that up to the savings in the premiums, as long as I’m fairly healthy, it tends to be a much better situation in terms of costs. Obviously the difference is going to vary between a traditional plan, depending on how much you utilize medical services in a given year. But again, the only way to even unlock the HSA is to be in a high deductible plan anyway.

Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff, Tim. And a really succinct but good overall summary of not only what is the HSA but how you have viewed it in your personal financial plan. And I would remind our listeners, as always, if you want to look at the show notes for this episode, you can go to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/podcast, pull up the episode, and you can get a link to not only a transcription of this episode but also other resources that we mentioned during this episode.

 

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 164: The Pros and Cons of Paying Cash for a Car


The Pros and Cons of Paying Cash for a Car

Tim Ulbrich and Tim Church debate the pros and cons of paying cash versus financing a car purchase.

Summary

Tim Ulbrich and Tim Church talk through several pros and cons of paying cash for a car on this week’s podcast episode. Tim Church recently purchased a used Honda CRV with cash and Tim Ulbrich has purchased several cars this way, including his current Honda Odyssey.

The pros they talk through of purchasing a car with cash include: buying a car within your means; saving a lump sum of money forces you to slow down as a buyer; never have to worry about paying interest; don’t have to worry about negative equity on your car; no monthly car payments which will open up your cash flow; get through the buying process quicker and with less paperwork; could have cheaper car insurance; and a sense of accomplishment.

The cons discussed are the opportunity cost of putting all of that cash elsewhere with a potentially better return; you might pay more when buying a car with cash depending on the person you are buying it from; may take a long time to save money; may dip into your emergency fund which is generally not a good idea; and a missed opportunity to help your credit score by making on-time payments.

Tim and Tim then discuss which move they think is best and the value of having a coach in your corner to help you navigate financial decisions like this such as one of YFP’s CERTIFIED FINANCIAL PLANNERS™.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Church, thank you for joining us. We’re going to talk all about car buying, pros and cons of paying cash for a vehicle versus finance a vehicle. And I thought it would be fun if we start by talking about the history of our vehicles, not only what are we currently driving, but have we been driving up to date as I know I’ve got some beaters in my history, and I’m guessing you’ve got some good stories as well. So Tim Church, give us some background. What’s been the vehicle story for Tim Church up until now?

Tim Church: You mean before the Lambo?

Tim Ulbrich: Yes, yes.

Tim Church: So I started out with a — what is it? — a 2001 Oldsmobile Alero. So this is a silver —

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, I had one of those!

Tim Church: You had one too?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Yeah, I did.

Tim Church: Oh, nice. Obviously that Oldsmobile is no longer in business, is no longer there. But it was a pretty good car for the first couple years and then a lot of stuff just started to break down and there was some issues with it. But it was still, it was a good first car. And then really, I went on, personally went on to a Honda Accord, which I still have. Still have that, so when did we get that? 2011. So that’s, we’re going on almost 10 years with that car, but it’s been great. It’s been very reliable. And then I married into a 2009 Volkswagen Rabbit, which finally we got rid of.

Tim Ulbrich: Which is well documented in “Seven Figure,” right? We talked about that.

Tim Church: Right. We talked about how much cash we had to shell out to fix everything on it because it was so expensive. So that was one that I had married into, but finally — as I know we’ll jump into — it is no longer. It’s gone because we were able to upgrade.

Tim Ulbrich: And we’re going to come back to that upgrade and the decision that you made, why you made it, which will lead nicely into our discussion about pros and cons of buying cash, using cash to purchase a car versus financing a vehicle. So my history on vehicles starts in — passed down, actually, from my brother to me junior year of high school a Toyota Tercel. Do you remember the Toyota Tercels?

Tim Church: Yeah, isn’t there — there’s a song, there’s like a hip hop that well documents Tercels I think.

Tim Ulbrich: I got to look. So our vehicle, we named it, of course, because it had so many issues. Its name was Tercy the Tercel. And it did its job and then my upgrade was actually to an Oldsmobile Alero as I was in pharmacy school. And I am now a proud owner, of course, of the Swagger Wagon, a minivan, No. 2 minivan. You know, obviously we’ve got so many kids now we really don’t have many options but to have the minivan, about to need that rooftop carrier here pretty soon. And in between that, I’ll talk about the Lincoln MKX and Nissan Sentra, a couple other cars along the way and certainly some good stories that will come with those as well. Now, some of you may be thinking, wait a minute, paying cash for a car, why on earth would I ever do that instead of just getting a loan? And I know this may sound like a far-fetched idea, but hang with us for a minute and on the YFP blog, titled “My Top Ten Financial Mistakes,” really I should have called that “Things I’m Really Embarrassed About,” here’s the reality of all the decisions that we’ve made. And we’ll link to that in the show notes. I talked about how I bought a car I had no business buying back in 2014. And really, here’s the quick gist of it. Jess and I were nearing the end of paying off her student loans, almost at the finish line, I bought a used Lincoln MKX. And it was nice. It was really nice. Leather heated seats, moonroof, awesome sound system. I think it had one of those Bose systems. But the reality was I didn’t need the car. And I’m even getting a warm, fuzzy feeling just thinking back to riding in that car, to be honest. It was awesome. But I had a fully functioning, paid off!, paid off, Nissan Sentra with less than 50,000 miles on it. And so we ended up paying $12,000 for the Lincoln MKX and that was after turning in our Nissan Sentra, mind you. And while $12,000 may not seem like a lot of money, imagine what we could have used that money for: getting out of debt quicker — again, almost at the finish line — building up our emergency fund, saving for retirement, saving for real estate investment property, insert any other financial opportunity that outweighs the benefits of the car. But you get the point. So we ended up selling the Lincoln MKX six months after, talk about serious buyer’s remorse and purchased a Nissan Altima with 87,000 miles on it from my mother- and father-in-law. And the difference, which was significant, in that process, in that transaction, became our last student loan payment of the more than $200,000 in student loan debt that we paid off. So certainly good news, the outcome was good. But we paid for it, albeit not in a catastrophic way. We paid for it in the way of sales tax, delaying our debt payoff timeline, but the lesson learned was certainly priceless and one that hangs with me today. And I still have that Altima. It’s got a couple of quirks, I’m embarrassed to admit on the show, if anybody wants to know, shoot me now. But at 140,000 and no major issues, it No. 1 gets me from Point A to Point B and No. 2, it’s safe. And I think that second point is really important that we preface our conversation and before we get too far in this debate. Because I’m all about safety, and I’m not suggesting as we talk about what type of cars might provide the sweet spot in terms of the value and keeping that expense low, I’m not suggesting that you drive an unsafe vehicle to save money. And I really think that it’s fair to assume with few exceptions that here in 2020 whether we own a 2020 car or a 2008 car, we’re all driving what would be deemed safe vehicles. I think we’re often splitting hairs perhaps between the new safety features in 2020 and those of 2012. And that can be easy to convince ourselves is a part of justifying a purchase and we need a new vehicle. But not necessarily does, you know, an older vehicle necessarily mean it’s not safe. So the truth is most of us need a car for some reason or another, and maybe that’s not the case, maybe some people have been able to cut back their car situation. And while this isn’t an episode on best practices to buy a car, reference Episode 047 if you want to hear more about that, thinking through your strategy for purchasing a car is important to do. And buying a car, as with anything else that carries a dollar sign, is an important part of your financial plan. Edmond says that the average car payment for a new vehicle reached an all-time high in March 2020 of $569 per month. $569 per month. So doing a bit of research, thinking of some options outside of regular financing, is always a good idea. And I think this debate is really healthy. So Tim, talk to us about before we get into the weeds on the pros and cons — and we’ll go through each in detail — talk to us about what you and Andria just purchased and ultimately why you guys made that decision.

Tim Church: Yeah, I think before I jump right into that, I think you made such a great point is when you go through this whole process, I think you have to look at the perspective that you have. I think a lot of people, they think a car is a great asset potentially, but it doesn’t necessarily generate revenue unless it’s some collectable or something like that. So and our mentality is really something that’s safe, something that gets us from Point A to Point B. So I think you made a really good point there. And when you look at it, the opportunity to do so many other things, that has to be key in that type of decision. But I can understand, there’s a lot of people that are car enthusiasts, so they really enjoy that aspect of trying to get something that either looks good, that’s fast or has other intrinsic value. But for us in general, when we were looking, it was like OK, it’s a Point A to Point B. But one of the things that we really did is just figure out what were we going to actually buy and why? And for us, it was really just a midsize SUV. Talked to other friends and family who have vehicles kind of in that line. And we weren’t looking for anything luxury, just kind of middle-of-the-road, something that was safe, something that’s reliable. And so we essentially kind of landed on we wanted to go with a Honda CRV. So once we kind of made that decision, OK, what type of vehicle we wanted, then it was looking at the different models within that particular vehicle. So there’s actually, I think there’s like four different tiers of that, which is crazy. And what’s interesting is at one level, there’s actually the safety features that are present that aren’t on the lowest model. So that was really one of the key points that we looked for when we wanted to purchase and also from what I’ve heard, I didn’t know specifically, but it actually gets you a little bit cheaper insurance because of the safety features, so that was kind of one of the things. But I mean, what we did was once we kind of settled on what that model, what that vehicle was that we were going for, then we kind of looked at the Kelly Blue Books, the Truecar, the Edmonds, and just tried to get an idea of based upon that model — and what we were looking for was a certified pre-owned, so we wanted to get a little bit of a deal on that but still would be fairly new. So we got an idea of like what other people were paying for, what was a reasonable deal. So we kind of had a ballpark range. And then what we did was really look at the Honda certified pre-owned site and then from there, it kind of gives you all of the dealers that are in your particular area that have that make and model of the vehicle along with the features and the mileage on that. So that was kind of an easy way versus having to go on every single dealer website and trying to figure out who has what. So I think that kind of actually saved us quite a bit of time doing that. So from that point, once we had the vehicle inventory from the Honda site, then we were able to go to the individual dealers and not actually physically but I mean, call them, email them, and get an idea of what their quotes would be and in this particular case, we were trading in the Volkswagen Rabbit, which I was not anticipating we were going to get much for that thing. But eventually, we ended up getting $2,000 as a trade-in, which is really I thought quite generous to say. But one of the things is that the dealers obviously have a lot of — their main tactic is to get you on property, on site, get the emotions flying around, so that you’re not leaving without something. And what I did, what we did, was really try to get as close to an estimate on the quotes, really just via email. I tried not to even talk to anybody, didn’t want to give them my phone number, just because I didn’t want to get harassed. And I would say that if you have to give out a phone number, give out a Google Voice number, not your actual phone number, so that at least you can kind of screen those calls. But actually, I was pretty successful with getting quotes via email just saying with our trade-in and what we were looking for. And then once I got a couple of those estimates, then I was basically playing against each dealer and trying to figure out before I even stepped on the property, what was going to be the best option in terms of the deal so that when I even got there, at least I had some documentation, I knew an estimate of what we would pay. Obviously it would depend on the exact amount for the trade-in, but that was kind of our approach. And I think it actually worked out really well and because of the COVID situation, I think they were more willing to negotiate even via email before even going in there. And that really saved I think a lot of time and effort going that route.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I love what you said there, Tim, in terms of the emotion. Every sale is made from an emotional point of view or anything we buy, we buy from an emotional state of being. So I think, you know, what you just outlined there is that you really took advantage of doing a lot of your homework in advance and really trying to make it objective and analytical, you bought yourself a little bit of time, you don’t have that pressure in the moment, and all of those pieces add up to being your advantage as the buyer. So you know, if you’re going in uneducated, you’re going in — you know, it’s kind of like when you go to the bank and you just start a conversation about buying a home. Like, oh, let’s just talk about it, right? All of a sudden you’ve got like a preapproval letter for like, you guys can get a home for $700,000. You’re like, whoa, wait a minute, we just wanted to see what was going on. So you know, I think here, this is a good reminder too of the value of as a buyer, trying to put those advantages in your cord to give you the best shot. So let’s dig into some of the pros and cons of purchasing a car with cash. We’re going to go back and forth between you and I on these. We’ll talk pros, and then we’ll talk about cons. And I’ll kick us off from my experience. You know, I think perhaps the most overlooked, yet most important pro, in my opinion, is that paying cash gives you a better chance of buying within your means and stops you from putting your car buying priorities out of order with other priorities that you’re trying to work on. And I think it’s important we preface part of this conversation that we’re doing so under the assumption that other people listening to this are in a position like you and I, Tim, that they are also trying to balance other competing priorities and goals, whether that be paying down debt or buying a home, paying down a mortgage, saving for kids’ college, investing more for the future, whatever other goal, any money that’s put toward a car you could argue that yeah, there’s somewhere else I could potentially use that money. But if there’s folks listening that maybe don’t have other competing financial priorities and cars are their thing, are their jam, you know, Ramit Sethi from “I Will Teach You to Be Rich” would say, “Dial it up. Dial it up.” If that’s your thing and you certainly can control other parts if you don’t have those competing pressures. So buying within your means, what I mean by this is if Jess and I say, you know what, our next car we’re going to buy and we’re going to buy cash, and we determine, OK, we’re going to get another minivan and we’re going to look for — we’ve had good luck with Honda Odysseys and we want to look for one that has about 70,000-75,000 miles, we know that they hold their value, so anything we can do to find one at a lower price point but that will also live hopefully beyond 150,000-175,000 miles, let’s say we’re going to save up $13,000 cash to make that purchase. You know, taking the time to do that not only slows you down as a buyer and really makes you critically think about OK, where does this fit in with the rest of our plan? And that delayed timeline I think really helps you look at that purchase in an objective manner but just takes discipline, you know, to do that. So I think naturally, the conversation Jess and I will have is, alright, is there something else we can do? Can we downgrade to a different model? Can we look at a car that has a little bit more miles? We don’t want to wait that long to save up all that money. So I think it drives down the purchase price. Obviously you would compare that again, you walk into the dealership, you finance something new, you’re only worried about that next payment and even that next payment may not be due for three or six months if they give you some runway. Maybe you’ve got some money down, maybe you don’t. Obviously you don’t have to think about that lump sum purchase. So I think it really helps you or gives you the best chance of buying within your means and putting your car buying priorities in the right order as you look at the rest of your financial plan. So Tim, what are your thoughts on other pros?
Tim Church: Yeah, well I think too, like thinking about that, so many times people are buying things where they say, “I can afford that monthly payment. I can make that payment.” So I know Dave Ramsey talks about this a lot. He says, are you saying you can — if you’re saying you can make the payment, can you actually afford it? Meaning can you pay for it? And so I think that mentality is really important here when you think about that because as you mentioned, yeah, maybe you can afford a $500-600 payment for a car that’s $30,000+. But how long if you actually had to pay for it cash, how long would it take you to buy that? And I guess if the answer is it takes you years to save up enough to pay for it, then maybe you’re buying a little bit out of your budget range for where you want to be. But I think obviously the other big pro is that you never have to worry about paying interest.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Yeah.

Tim Church: So even though a lot of times people will argue that car payments or car financing is pretty cheap and sometimes you can get close to 0%, maybe 1-2% interest rate on a car — and over the long term, even if it’s a standard term of five years or so, the interest may not be astronomical compared to what we would see with student loans or a mortgage or something like that. But obviously, that’s still money that you don’t have to pay for when you come to the table with cash.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And I think it reminds me of, similar to what we talk about on the mortgage of a 30 versus a 20 versus a 15, no mortgage, you’re obviously going to minimize the amount of interest that’s paid over the life of the loan, which can have an opportunity cost. And we’ll talk about that here in a little bit with the cons as I think that is worth considering. Tim, along that line, you know, obviously we know about financing, one of the things I also think about is you don’t have to worry about the negative equity position. And what I mean by negative equity is that you owe more on your car loan than the vehicle is worth. And this is also known as being upside down on your car loan, which is so common with new cars, right? Because especially if you fully finance it or have little down on that purchase, we all know that the second you drive a car off the lot, the value of that car goes down significantly in that moment but also quickly in those first few years. So many people, myself in previous vehicles, you’ll find yourself in a position where you likely owe more on the vehicle to pay it off than it is actually worth in terms of a market resale value from Kelly Blue Book or another source like that. So you know, I don’t really ever think of a car as an asset, although a paid off car is technically an asset. I think Robert Kiyosaki would fall over if he heard us talk about a car being an asset. But you know, I guess if we had to say it’s nice in the sense that even if my car is only worth $5,000 or $6,000 or $7,000, I’m not in a negative equity position. And if need be for whatever reason, perhaps I could sell that and free up some cash. So I think that’s certainly a pro as well.

Tim Church: Yeah, and I think obviously the next pro, so No. 4, means you don’t have any payments. So when you come and pay it off, you don’t have that monthly payment. So you’re really opening up your cash flow from that point forward. And I think for us, that was such a powerful thing to look at. So it ended up not taking us too many months to save up and pay cash because as we talked about not that long ago, we knocked out the student loans. So it was much easier and faster to kind of save up for it. But moving forward, really, when you think about those loan payments, you’re talking about $500+, like I don’t want that coming out of my budget. Like I’m trying to free up as much cash as possible moving forward to put towards things that are assets, so retirement accounts, other opportunities that may come about. So to me, that was like probably the No. 1 reason for wanting to pay cash for the car.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s good. And another pro, Tim, that I think of from previous experiences — the memory is coming alive as I’m even thinking about it — if anybody has financed a car before, you know what that feeling is like at the dealership. You know, you go to the back room, right? All the papers come out and you sit down with the finance guy and you’re signing a bunch of papers and the upsells start happening, one after one after one in terms of other things that might be tacked onto that. And so you know, obviously the pro here is that you can get through the overall buying process quicker with less paperwork if you’re paying cash. You write the check or if Joe Baker is listening, perhaps he’s showing up with the cash in envelope, and you move on and certainly you don’t have to deal with all that financing. And we’ll talk about some cons that could come from that as well. But certainly from a process standpoint, quicker and easier.

Tim Church: So the other potential pro — and I’ll say potential, I’ll preface it that — is you could have cheaper car insurance. Now if you look at just kind of on a one-to-one basis looking at what it costs to insure a car that has a loan on it versus not, usually that aspect alone is not going to make it cheaper. But when you have a lender and you have a loan on the vehicle, they may require certain coverage options that you may not necessarily want or need. So one of the things that a lender may require you to have is gap coverage, so that essentially covers the gap between the cost of a replacement for a new vehicle and the current value of the vehicle. So that’s something that you may not have to have on your policy along with maybe some other options that a lender is requiring you to have. So I would say that’s a potential.

Tim Ulbrich: And I want to wrap up the pros, Tim, by mentioning that you cannot overlook the sense of accomplishment and just the feeling and the behavioral aspect of this. And it’s hard to put a monetary value to that. We talk about that all the time on the show when we talk about the behavioral part of the financial plan. But feeling that sense of winning and not having a payment, whether it’s student loans, whether it’s a mortgage, whether here it’s a car, can be incredibly motivating towards achieving other goals. And so I think often, you’ll see folks that it’s not just the lack of payment but all of a sudden they have then been motivated to take those monies and put them to use for them in terms of investing, whether that be in the market or real estate or whatever it be to help get that growth side of it as well. So I think that sense of accomplishment is really important. Alright, let’s talk about the cons. What are your thoughts here in terms of the potential cons of paying cash for a car?

Tim Church: Yeah, so I think one of the biggest arguments is that there’s an opportunity cost versus throwing all that cash that you have at a car, especially if you can get a low interest rate. So one of the arguments could be let’s say you’re going to get a low interest rate, like 1-3% or something like that. Instead of putting that huge lump sum of money, could you get a better return in the stock market? Could you get a better return on putting a down payment for an investment property or some other investment where you may get a better return? So I think that’s usually one of the biggest arguments against paying cash for a car, especially in that situation.

Tim Ulbrich: I think, Tim, to that point, one of the common I guess debates is the right word that I have on this topic is that often, the point of comparison I hear is a new car that’s offering 0%, 0.9%, some low financing. But I don’t think that’s a comparison we’re talking about. I mean, I’m thinking of the mindset of a used car, 40,000, 50,000, 60,000, 70,000 miles on it, lot of the depreciation has already happened. So I think the financing on the new car, certainly. It’s great. The financing on a used car, not as competitive. Typically not anywhere near as competitive. So I think that point of comparison can even be off as folks are weighing those two options. Another con, Tim, that I think about and I’ve heard people talk about this is the thought that you can actually pay more when you’re paying cash for a car, especially if the sales associate gets commission on the financing. And I think that’s an important consideration. I mean, I think the traditional thought here is hey, if you’ve got a wad of cash and it’s the end of the month and they’re trying to meet quotas for the month, like you’re really in the best negotiation position. But that may not always be true. And I think this is certainly depends on the individual that you’re buying the car from. But I think it’s at least a consideration that paying cash may not necessarily mean a better deal and at some point may actually mean that you pay a little bit more.

Tim Church: Yeah, I think that one’s always interesting. I feel like I’ve always learned it as the opposite.

Tim Ulbrich: Correct.

Tim Church: That if you have cash, you have more negotiating power, but I feel like the more I’ve come across, especially depending on what kind of cut the sales associates are getting that it may be the opposite. The other thing I think as a con is that depending on what you’re looking at buying, I mean, it may take a long time to actually save up for that money. It really depends on obviously the type of car that you want but also your overall situation. So if you’re dead set on wanting to pay cash, whether that’s a new car or used car, it may take a lot of time. And maybe you’re not willing to wait that long, depending on the situation and how dire it is that you have to have a different vehicle, an upgraded vehicle. But that may be a big con if it’s going to take several months to maybe even a year or more.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think building on that, Tim, I think saving up for a car, even if it’s used, I mean, I gave the example before of a used Honda Odyssey can easily $14,000, $15,000, $16,000, even with 70,000-80,000 miles on it. Saving that much, depending on your timeline, I’m trying to do that even within a year period, that’s going to be a big amount each and every month, and that could put other financial priorities on hold and that you might have to either pause other things or you are delaying other goals that you’re trying to achieve. So I think to this point, Tim, I’d love to hear from your perspective, you know, I know a little bit of the behind-the-curtain of the Churches, you know, in terms of other things that you guys are working on and other things, but regardless, any listener is usually working through multiple goals. So how did you guys reconcile this one in terms of paying cash despite having other goals that are on the horizon?

Tim Church: Yeah, that’s a great question. And I think for us, it was just being kind of crazy. It’s like we had the huge goal of knocking out the student loans. But then it was like, OK, these other life events and things just happened right after that. So the first thing was really bulking up and beefing up that emergency fund. So that was really the first thing that we did after paying off the student loans. So why I took a little bit longer than I anticipated to save up and pay cash is we wanted to beef that up first, really get that to a position — and then and only after that was done really kind of put most of our focus on saving for the car. And I mean, along the whole time, we were still putting money towards our HSA, maxing that out, getting our matches through our employer-sponsored plans. So we were doing multiple things but really just the main focus was beefing up that emergency fund and then really going right after saving up for the car.

Tim Ulbrich: And what I love, Tim, about what you guys did, which I think is easier said than done but I so value both for the listeners to hear, is if you have identified goals, not only just if you’re in the middle of student loans but if you know, OK, we want to plus up the emergency fund, we want to save this much for a down payment on a home, we want to do this much for retirement or whatever the goal would be, when you meet one of those goals, you instantly redirect those funds that were going towards whatever that goal was to the next goal that you’re working on or goals at the same time. Because with a pause or with time, that money can certainly evaporate quickly into different areas that are always surprising about where it goes. And being able to identify where you want that to go I think is so, so important and a cool part of the story in what you guys did. Tim, you mentioned emergency fund. What are your thoughts here in terms of a potential con that folks may end up dipping into an emergency fund? And is that a justifiable dip in that fund to be able to pay cash for a car?

Tim Church: Yeah, that’s a good one. I mean, I think it can be tempting when you — however you have your emergency fund set up, when you have a chunk of cash there, I think it can be so tempting to want to use that, break into it, to put towards a new or used vehicle but when you’re paying for cash. Even for us, just looking at it was tough because we knew the timeline was going to be stretched because of it. But I think some people may be tempted and may have even dipped into that emergency fund to want to pay cash. But you know, which may have worked out OK, but obviously the downside is that if something comes up in that interim period directly after the purchase or within that, you might be in a bad situation. And yeah, you may have a paid-for car, but you may not have enough savings and you may have to look at other means on how you’re going to get around that and make it work if you’re in a tough spot. So I think that is one thing that you really have to consider as you’re going through the process.

Tim Ulbrich: And the last con here — or at least the last one we’ll discuss, I think there’s probably more we’re not even touching on here — the last con in terms of paying cash for a car I think would be the missed opportunity to help the credit score in terms of making regular, on-time payments. Now, of course that assumes that somebody’s making on-time payments. So if you were to finance a car and you don’t or you’re overleveraging yourself, that can have the opposite impact. But for those that would be making on-time payments or perhaps even paying off some of that debt early, obviously paying cash for a car would remove that opportunity. But I think it’s safe to say most folks have multiple other areas in which they’re probably able to impact their credit score in a positive way that wouldn’t be dependent upon a car purchase. So there you have it, pros and cons of paying cash for a car versus financing a vehicle.

Tim Church: So Tim, what do you think the best thing to do is?

Tim Ulbrich: Gees, million dollar question, right? You know, obviously I’m biased. We’ve paid cash for most, not all, of our cars. And I honestly, I struggle with this one. I think that because we’re purchasing used vehicle and I’m not comparing new vehicles as even an option, if anybody’s looked at what a new Honda Odyssey costs, my gosh, crazy. So you know, we’re looking at used vehicles. For us, it’s kind of a get to Point A to Point B, doesn’t need to be fancy, needs to do the job, got to have the DVD for the kids so they keep quiet somewhat in the back of the car. So for us, I have that bias. But I think it really depends on the situation and other financial priorities. I do think there’s a real opportunity cost that people need to consider saving up a wad of cash. Now, if you can convince yourself that a $5,000 car is an option for you, which I would argue I think it is for many people that are listening, maybe not all, but for many people, then I think you’re obviously minimizing the negative impact of what that opportunity cost could be of the time that’s delayed and the monies that are needed to save for that. But I really believe, back to one of the pros we talked about, I really believe for most cases and most situation, never in all, most cases and most situation, saving up and paying cash for a used car, I think the benefit of forcing you to slow down, further evaluate the purchase, think about how it fits into the financial plan, and ultimately probably driving down the purchase price a little bit is really going to have a net positive effect on the rest of your financial plan. Certainly other benefits that are there as well. So I think if somebody is talking about buying a $30,000 car, could I justify saving cash and paying cash for it? Probably not. But I’m not looking at a $30,000 purchase. I think best case scenario in my mind is you think about other competing priorities and putting your money into assets that are going up, not going down, would be to try to minimize as much as you can the purchase price of a depreciable asset. And here we’re talking about one while we’re talking about cars. So Tim, other factors we need to keep in mind when talking about buying a used car. What have we not talked about that folks should consider?

Tim Church: I think we covered most of the common things to consider. I mean, I would just kind of reiterate the point, like I’m looking at our situation right now. You know, we have a paid-for Honda CRV, it’s not brand new, I think it’s almost about three years old now, which is much, much cheaper than a brand new one. And that feeling, No. 1, that it’s paid off, that there’s no payments, I mean, that feeling is just pretty awesome. And then moving forward from this point, there’s not going to be any car payments. And to me, I didn’t realize how powerful that was going to be because my first car was financed. And it was like a $400+ payment every month. And I mean, I remember the pain of that. And so I think that at this point, just moving forward and that feeling is more powerful than I anticipated. And for me, personally, I’m OK with that opportunity cost knowing that we had to save up and pay for it. I know a lot of other people, it really depends on what your risk tolerance situation is and how aggressive you want to be with investments. But I think for us, like I feel that it was a great decision.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s great stuff. And I think the question I would leave our listeners to reflect upon is, there’s not a right answer here. How important is a car to you? And how important is it relative to other parts of your financial plan? You know, I’ve determined, Jess and I have determined, that a car is pretty darn low on the totem pole as I’ve put it in the context of other areas that money could be going towards. But that does not mean that’s true for everyone. Nor does it mean there’s a right or a wrong here. So if a car means a lot to you, as I mentioned, awesome. Make sure you appropriately prioritize that and fund it accordingly. Ramit Sethi would say, “Figure that out.” Figure out how you can prioritize that and turn down, dial down anything else that doesn’t matter. But if not, my question is, why are you spending so much money on a car at the expense of other goals? And what adjustments might you be able to make to help get you towards those other goals if you determine that those matter a little bit more. I think that connects so well, Tim, to our financial planning services that we offer, comprehensive financial planning, over at Your Financial Pharmacist. You know, like anything else that carries a dollar sign in your life, we believe that here as we’re talking about car buying, this is one part of the financial plan. And I talk often about not looking at the financial plan — any part of the financial plan — in a silo. And I think here, it’s a great reminder. As you’re looking at your car, how does your car fit with your debt, with your savings goals, with every other part of your financial plan? And having a coach, having a planner, that can work with you to identify those goals, to prioritize those goals, to fund those goals, is critically important. And that really is what we believe is the value of comprehensive financial planning and what our planners do so well over at YFP Planning. So for those that are interested in working one-on-one with a financial planner, certified financial planner at YFP Planning, head on over to YFPPlanning.com, where you can book a free discovery call to learn more about our services. And as always, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to your show each and every week. Have a great rest of your day.

 

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 163: Investing Beyond the 401k/403b


Investing Beyond the 401k/403b

Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker talk about investing beyond the 401k or 403b and break down the traditional IRA, Roth IRA, HSA, SEP IRA and taxable/brokerage accounts by discussing their contribution limits, how to appropriately use them and the advantages and disadvantages of each.

Summary

Tim Baker joins Tim Ulbrich on this week’s episode to break down investment vehicles beyond the 401k and 403b. To start, Tim Baker explains that investing is just one part of the financial plan and should not be looked at in a silo. However, when he works with financial planning clients he helps to get their nest egg on track so that they are financially prepared for their retirement some pharmacists feel overwhelmed that they will need $4 or $5 million at retirement. The certified financial planners at YFP Planning help to provide actionable steps to help you get you on track while keeping the rest of your financial plan in mind.

Tim runs through several investment vehicle options that are outside of the 401k or 403b employer-sponsored plans. He digs into the IRA, Roth IRA, HSA, SEP IRA and taxable/brokerage accounts and discusses their contribution limits, how to appropriately use them and the advantages and disadvantages of each. Tim also talks through YFP’s view of the priority of investing, common mistakes and assessing risk tolerance and risk capacity.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, welcome back to the show. Two weeks in a row!

Tim Baker: Yeah, crazy. Good to be back.

Tim Ulbrich: Fresh off vacation, right? You’re primed and ready to go, talk about investing?

Tim Baker: Yeah. We spent a week at the Jersey shore, kind of close to my old stomping grounds. And good family vacation away from Baltimore and the city and do some good social distancing on the beach. And yeah, just feeling happy to be back but glad I got to get some quality time with the fam.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. So we’re back at it here today, talking about how to invest your money beyond an employer-sponsored plan like a 401k or a 403b, which we’ve talked about many times before on the podcast. And before we jump into this discussion, Tim, I think it’s important that we highlight, as I know I hear you say often, that investing, albeit a very important part of the financial plan, it is just one part of the financial plan. So talk to us about why that is so important that look at it that way. And really, what are all of the different parts that you work with in terms of the financial plan with clients?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think one of the issues that I have in, you know, with other financial planners, financial advisors, is a lot of financial advisors will say, “Hey, I do financial planning and investment management.” And it kind of, it grinds my gears a little bit because I think those are like one and the same. Like the investment management is nested in financial planning in the majority of cases. But the reason it’s separated out I think is because a lot of advisors will say, “I do financial planning,” but it’s really just managing your investments. They’ll say, “Hey, Tim, you have half a million dollars, we’ll manage that for a fee or we’ll get commissions or things like that. And then maybe we’ll talk about some of these other things along the way like insurance, especially if I can sell you insurance or hey, the kids are going to college. You’re probably not going to get any help with your student loans or anything like that. So to me, you kind of follow the money. So with the way that most advisors are paid, it’s based on the investments and then if they can sell you kind of a crappy insurance product. So it has like this elevated designation of, you know, with regard to the financial plan. And it is important and it is a main driver. But I think, you know, getting your student loans right, having a savings plan, a plan for the debt, a plan to pay off your house, you’re properly protected from an insurance perspective so you’re managing your risk, estate plan, your taxes, which permeate everything, you’re doing some planning for that. Like to me, it’s just one piece of the puzzle. And I think we kind of put the investment up on a pedestal. And again, it’s important. It’s typically the thing that’s most confusing or most exciting to the average consumer because it’s kind of like this, oh, OK, I can buy shares of this and I can be investing in these companies. But I often argue that those are some times where the more exciting an investment is, typically the worse it is for the investor because they’re chasing returns or they’re tweaking too much. So you know, at YFP, we do all of the things and we fit the investment and retirement piece into that puzzle. But then we also kind of go beyond where we talk about things like credit, credit score, credit report, and you know, kind of the life events of hey, Tim, I’m buying a house, I’m buying a car. I’m getting married, so now I’m combining finances, we’re having a baby, we’re retiring in a couple years, we’re getting into real estate investing, we’re negotiating our salary, we’re downsizing. Whatever that is, to me, those are the main — kind of some of the main drivers. We have the structure that is the financial plan, but then we have these life events that happen that can throw a wrench and kind of force us to zig and zag. So again, the investment is super important, but at the end of the day, it’s going to be one piece of the overall financial journey.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we’re going to keep coming back to this over and over again, that the financial plan and how you think through your financial decisions should be comprehensive, comprehensive, comprehensive. And so I think especially because we do so many episodes or blog posts or whatever that are more topical in nature. So here, we’re talking about investing. It might be student loans, it might be home buying. And I think it’s just human behavior that you hear something and you’re like, ooh, I can optimize that. Maybe after today, somebody’s like, ooh, I should go max out my Roth IRA. But you know, you take a step back and that may or may not be the best decision once you have a chance to look at all of the different components of the financial plan and understand how one decision can have a ripple effect into the others. So let’s jump in. I want to start by talking about the end, and that really is the nest egg. As we talk about long-term savings, trying to determine what we ultimately need to have saved so that we can turn that into a meaningful plan of what we should be doing today. So as you work with clients, Tim, on this long-term savings strategy, talk us through why that nest egg calculation is so important, what it is, and then how you ultimately are able to back that into a plan of something that they can take action on today.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, typically when I talk to some of our clients that are in maybe 20s, 30s or even 40s, you know, I’ll ask the question, I’m like, “Well, how are you feeling about your retirement?” And you know, sometimes the question is — sometimes, especially early on in the 20s and maybe even 30s, it’s kind of similar to the question that we would ask when we would ask students and residents, probably students at like the APhA conference, we would say like, “How are you feeling about your student loans?” And a lot of the answer was like, “Ah, I just don’t even really look at it. I’m not really worried about it. I’ll figure it out later.” And that kind of perpetuates into like the next, really one of the next big things is trying to establish retirements savings. So it’s like, ah, I don’t really know. So then if I ask the follow-up question — if I say something, if I get an answer like, “Well, I guess I feel good about it, I’m getting a match and maybe I’m putting a little money into like an IRA or something,” I’m like, “Well, do you feel like you’re on track?” And you know, I think that question then kind of goes into like, well, I don’t know. I’m not really sure. I think I want to retire at 65, but there’s some people that think they have to retire or that they’re going to work forever. So what the nest egg is is it’s an exercise that we do, it’s a calculation that we do, and I kind of walk it line-by-line through with the client that says, that shows them if they’re — basically, are they on track or off track? And it’s kind of a binary thing. So what I often say to a lot of clients is like I say, “Hey, you know, you probably need $4 or $5 million to retire.

Tim Ulbrich: What?

Tim Baker: And they typically — yeah — and then they typically look at me like I have 4 or 5 million heads, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.
Tim Baker: So I say, “Alright, once” — I’m processing that look — once we get beyond that and what we typically do is then is we start to break or deconstruct that number down to a monthly number that we can digest today. So big, big number, way in the future, Tim, that doesn’t mean anything to me. That’s just this noise. That doesn’t connect. That doesn’t connect with me today. So what we do is we then break it down to a number that they can sink their teeth in today. So I can say, “OK, if you need — if we had nothing saved for retirement and you’re getting the match and maybe you’re maxing out your Roth IRA, you’re still running a deficit of $100 per month. So we need to maybe put a little bit money into the 401k or something like that.” So what it does is it provides actionable steps, you know, for them to kind of get on track. And then as they kind of pursue, we kind of check in with that calculation as the years go by, and then as we get into the 40s and 50s and 60s and 70s, we do a little bit more robust planning and kind of decisions that are stuff like, OK, if we retire early or if we downsize our house or if we relocate to this state that’s maybe more tax-free, we can kind of show the effects of that and if your money’s going to run out or not and at what age. So longer story longer, the nest egg calculation is really meant to say, alright, we need some type of money in the future so you’re 30-, 20-, 20-, 30-, 35-year-older self can retire and really not have to work anymore or have the option not to work. So you know, to bring this full circle, the investment plan and the retirement plan that’s kind of executed per what the nest egg says is really, really, really important.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and you know, we’ve mentioned before on the show that saving for the future, whether it’s traditional retirement or something else, it shouldn’t be I hope, I wish, I dream, maybe. I mean, it’s a set of assumptions based on mathematical calculations. And we may or may not like the outcome of that, but we can then begin to understand the variables that go into that calculation and make adjustments or changes, whether that be investments or changes in expectations or adjustments in changes on how we’re executing our savings plan. And so Tim, we talk a lot about wow, it’s really important to invest, invest, invest and do so at an early age and you’ve got to take advantage of compound interest and let it work its magic. But I think we often brush over, you know, what does that mean? And why is that so tangible? So give us the 20,000-foot view of exactly what is compound interest, why that’s so important, and then perhaps an example of how investing can really help someone grow their nest egg. So somebody who is and is not investing.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, we use this quote by Albert Einstein, and it says, “Compound interest is the eighth wonder of the world. He who understands it, earns it. He who doesn’t, pays it.” So a lot of pharmacists, especially early on in their career, they’re feeling it from the paying it side, right? Oh man, I’ve got $200,000 in debt, I’m paying 6.5-7% in interest, you know, this is terrible. But you know, once we kind of have a plan for the loans — and I’m not saying it needs to be paid off — but once we have an intentional plan for the loans and our consumer debt is in check, we have an emergency fund in place, we can then really start dipping our toe very seriously into the investment waters. So you know, so that’s really the idea is that we want the compound interest is our money, we’re taking risks to earn it. But we’re putting it out, we’re putting it into companies and to maybe bonds and we’re saying, “Alright, here’s some money. Hopefully we can earn dividends and capital appreciation as we go. And I can get a much better return down in, basically in the future.” So to give you kind of a case study — and the reason this is really important is, you know, if we talk about Ally Bank, a big one for a high yield savings vehicle, but as many people with where interest rates are, you’re making like 1%. And one of the main things that you’re combating as you’re building wealth is tax, so Uncle Sam always needs his bite of the apple, and inflation. So — and I think, Tim, you might have created this graph, but I showed the graph of the $10 latte. So you know, if you have a latte that costs $4 in 2020, using historical rates of inflation of about 3%, in 30 years, that latte will cost $10. So this is why my dad, who’s in his 70s, would say, “Well, Tim, back in my day, the nickel would buy the whole candy store.” And now it doesn’t buy anything because prices, the prices of goods and services go up naturally over time.

Tim Ulbrich: So just a quick aside, Tim, on that. It made me laugh when you said that. I just — the other day with my boys I had a box of Cherry Heads with like a $.25 sign on the corner of the box, and I was like, “When I was a kid, we used to go out to the candy store. And those were not $.25.” So.

Tim Baker: Yeah. I mean, my wife sent me a picture of I think she filled up at like $1.25 because she had some points or whatever. And I was kind of reminiscing, like I think it was either when I started driving or when my brother started driving, gas was at like $.89 or $.99 a gallon.

Tim Ulbrich: I remember that.

Tim Baker: You know? And you see it in the movies. And those are — that’s a staple of American life. That’s pretty kind of inflation-focused because people really get upset when gas goes up because it’s right in our face, but if you think about all these other, I mean — gosh, we could talk about college tuition and drive our listeners off a cliff here. But yeah, I mean, prices just go up. So to combat the taxman and the inflation monster, we have to — we can’t just put our money into the mattress and not take risks. We can’t just put our money into a bank account and not take risks because naturally, maybe that $500,000 that you have in your bank account, maybe it’ll some interest, but in 30 years, it’s going to purchase about half of what you can purchase today.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: So if we take a case study here, so we’re going to talk about Conservative Jane. So Conservative Jane, she’s a pharmacist, she makes $120,000 in income, she gets her 3% cost of living raises, which might be generous. She gets that every year. She’s going to put 10% into her retirement plan, but she’s just going to put it into a Money Market, which is like a cash-like investment. And she’s going to work for 30 years. Over the course of that 30 years, she’s going to accumulate a nest egg of about $600,000. So you’re going to say, hey, that’s not too bad. But because hopefully a lot of our listeners are reading “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” we assert that — or at least you and Tim Church assert and I agree — that we need to be thinking like millionaires because it’s going to — that is what it will take for us to achieve that financial freedom, that financial independence that we’re looking for. So this Conservative Jane, she’s really afraid about what the market has done in the ‘08-’09 crisis, the subprime mortgage crisis if you remember that, the COVID crisis where the stock market did a nose dive here and now is recovering. And she’s saying, “You know what? I don’t want to look at my balance and see it go down. I just want to slow and steady.” So unfortunately, that amount of money is not really — if she retires at 65, it’s not going to last her until 95, 100, 105, which is typically what she’ll live to. So in an alternate reality, which again, another of maybe Einstein’s theories, we wave our wand and we say, OK, if we take a more aggressive stance with our investments and we take the exact same Conservative Jane with the same income, $120,000, the same cost of living raises, the same contribution amount, 10%, and the same timeline of career, 30-year, and the only thing that we do differently, the only variable that we change is we change the stance towards investment. So instead of being conservative, we’re being aggressive. And what the market bears consistently over 20+-year periods, it’s about a 10% return. And when we adjust that down for inflation, it’s about a 6.87% return. So this is where Aggressive Jane is now taking advantage of that compound interest, so those capital appreciation where you buy that stock at $100 and it sells for $500 in the future. Or the dividends that these companies will reward shareholders over time for being investors. So when we do that and we get that 7% return, it’s about a $1.2 million swing. So that nest egg is not going to be $600,000 now. With Aggressive Jane, it’s going to be $1.8 million. So and you’re not doing anything different except for your stance. So it’s going to be a rockier road, it’s going to be a bumpier road because you’re going to have ups and downs in the market, but if you believe that the market takes care of you over time like we do, it’s going to be OK. So to me, that is the power. And when we show that and we can demonstrate that in the nest egg calculation to say, hey, we’ll talk about risk here in a little bit. This is your risk tolerance, you’re showing this type of portfolio, but if we’re a little bit more aggressive, then they’re like, oh, well I don’t have to save as much right now or I’m actually set for where I’m at. I don’t have to work until I’m 85 years old. And I think demonstrating that, you kind of get that (sigh). And we’ve had clients that have looked at this and were like, alright, well, one spouse was maybe I don’t need to work anymore. We could have a single-income family because we want to stay home and raise the kids. That’s the power in it is to have some intentionality about what we’re doing and we’re not just like oh, I don’t really know how I’m tracking for retirement. And the sooner that you do it, you know, one of the big things that we say with working with a lot of young professionals is time is a great asset to have. We do believe that the income that pharmacists make is great. But time is a great asset to have, and it can kind of be a double-edged sword because some people are like, well, I have 20-30 years to figure that out. But the sooner that you figure it out, the better.

Tim Ulbrich: And I just love that example because as you had mentioned, one variable that was different, you know, where you put that money — so instead of a Money Market account, you’re investing that. We’ll talk about vehicles to do that here in a moment — the only variable that’s different. So you’ve already done the hard work. You’ve already said, “I’m going to save x% of my salary.” That example was 10%, perhaps those that are listening are aspiring for a higher number. But you’ve already made that hard decision. Now it’s a matter of where do I put that to be able to put myself in the best advantage and best position to achieve my long-term goals. So we’ve talked about the concept of what you need in the nest egg. We’ve talked about why investing and compound interest is so important. So the next natural question is, well, how do you get there? Where do I put my money? What are the options that I have available? And this episode is all about investing beyond the 401k and 403b. So we’re not going to talk about those two, and we’ll link to our investing series back from episodes 072-076 where we have more information on those. So let’s jump into those other investment vehicles beyond the 401k or 403b, Tim. And here we’re going to be talking about traditional IRAs, Roth IRAs, HSAs, SEP IRAs and taxable brokerage accounts. So we’re going to do this in a rapid-fire format. So Tim, we’ll tee up each one one-by-one, we’ll start with the IRA. And I’d love for you to talk about, you know, generally, characteristics and design, contribution limits and perhaps some advantages and disadvantages with each of these options. So let’s start off with the IRA.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the traditional IRA or just sometimes called an IRA, this is an investment vehicle, I like to say investment bucket, that you can use as an investor often to supplement your 401k, 403b. So with this particular bucket, it is a bucket that you fill with pre-tax dollars. So anybody can contribute — anybody that has earned income can contribute to a traditional IRA. Now, once you start making more money than say like a resident makes, if you’re a normally salaried pharmacist, you don’t get that deduction but you can still put non-deductible contributions into your IRA, which you don’t get that tax benefit. And then any money — and this goes for any of these vehicles that we’re talking about — any money that’s inside of that bucket grows tax-free. So if you get investment income or if you get dividends paid, you’re not taxed on that. So outside of that, in the taxable account, you are taxed on that. And I’ll talk about that when we get there. So typically the contributions that you can make into these accounts are $6,000. So that’s in aggregate with the Roth IRA, which we’ll talk about here in a second, next. So if you put $4,000 into a traditional IRA, you can only put $2,000 into a Roth. So it’s in aggregate. But it’s completely separate from your 401k, 403, TSP. So these aren’t tied together in terms of contribution amount. Once you reach age 50 or older, you can put an extra $1,000. And like I said, this is subject to phase out for the deduction. So the IRS will look at your AGI and say, “Hey, Tim, you make too much money. You can put money in here, but you’re not getting that deduction.” So the appropriate use here is that you’re supplementing a 401k or you have no retirement savings, so again, we work with a lot of independent pharmacists that don’t provide a 401k to their employers. So call me if that’s the case, we can definitely help there. But in the meantime, you can use this as really your main retirement. And then in that case, you do get a full deduction, no matter what you make. You want to shelter your income from tax, so if you are trying to lower your AGI and you can, if you’re in the right tax bracket, so you’re a resident, that’s the way to do it, you’re deferring taxes on your investment portfolio. So it’s not taxed going in, but it is going to be taxed coming out when you distribute it in retirement. And then this is for long-term accumulation for retirement. So you’re not going to put money in here and then use it for a home purchase or something like that. So the biggest advantages here is, again, it’s a tax benefit, the investing selection is nice. So you can typically — I always talk about with the 401k, you kind of have to play with the toys in the sandbox, so you only get 20-30 selection. Here, you can basically invest in anything you want.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: And typically, less fees associated with it. Now the big drawback is if you do take money out, it’s a 10% penalty unless you’re 59.5. You can take loans against it, which I think is actually a benefit. And then the distributions when you’re retired are taxed as ordinary income, which is not great. So hopefully — I don’t know if that was quick enough, Tim, but those are the high level pieces.

Tim Ulbrich: No, that’s great. So there we were talking about traditional IRA. Let’s talk for a couple moments then about the Roth IRA.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so Roth IRA, a lot of the same things are true. The main difference here is that this is — you’re contributing it to a Roth IRA with after-tax monies, which means that you don’t get a deduction going in, so you pay the tax up front, it grows tax-free, and then when you distribute it in retirement, it comes out tax-free. So one of the things I’ll talk about is like I say, “OK, Tim Ulbrich, you have $1 million in your Roth IRA and $1 million in your traditional IRA. How much money do you have?” Unfortunately, your balance sheet says $2 million, but that’s not what you actually own because in the traditional IRA, Uncle Sam hasn’t taken his bite of the apple. So if you’re in a 25% tax bracket, in the traditional IRA, you own $750,000 of that and the government owns $250,000 of that as it’s distributed. So that’s kind of a high-level look at that. So you can convert a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA, and that’s kind of a separate ball of wax, but you can contribute up to $6,000, there’s a catch-up phase, again, this is typically to supplement the 401k. You’re looking for long-term retirement. You can use this money for like a first-time home purchase, you can distribute up to $10,000 without a 10% penalty. So there are some little nuances to — you don’t have loans or anything like that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: And typically the investment selection is good. There’s less fees associated in most cases compared to like a 401k. And your distributions of basis, which is the money that you put in, are always tax- and penalty-free. Now the earnings that it makes could be taxed and could be penalized based on the situation, so that’s something to keep in mind. So high level between traditional pre-tax, not taxed going in, grows tax-free, tax comes out when you distribute it. For a Roth, it’s taxed going in, it grows tax-free, and then it’s not taxed coming out. So I usually take clients through some pretty cool graphics that show them that because it’s harder — oh, and the big thing I forgot to say — this is important — is that for a Roth, for a traditional IRA, anybody can contribute to a traditional IRA, maybe not get the deductions. For a Roth, once you start making a certain amount of money, the door starts to slam shut for you to actually make contributions. So as a single earner in 2020, once you start making more than $124,000, that Roth IRA door starts to shut. So then that’s typically where we do a nondeductible contribution to an IRA and then do a backdoor contribution to a Roth IRA.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and since you mentioned that, Tim, and I’m glad you did, the backdoor, I would point our listeners to Episode 096. We talked about how to do a backdoor Roth IRA. And we also have a blog post on why every pharmacist should consider that as an option with their investing plan. We’ll link to both of those in the show notes. So that’s the IRA and the Roth IRA. Next up is the Health Savings Account, the HSA, also known as the Stealth IRA. Talk to us about that one.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So this is typically paired with a high deductible health plan. So a high deductible health plan is a health plan that you’re — for an individual, the minimum annual deductible is $1,400 a year or more. And the max out-of-pocket expense is $6,900 a year more. So if you have the option with your employer, you’re young, you’re healthy — I guess you can be older and healthy — but if you’re healthy, you don’t go to the doctor a lot, this might be a thing to look at. And you can couple the HSA with this. So this is — the HSA is different from an FSA. FSA is a use-or-lose fund. So every year, you’re going to say, “OK, if I put $1,000 into this and I don’t use it, then I lose it.” And it doesn’t accumulate over time, so at the end of the year, you’re buying a bunch of stuff for like contacts and things like that. I don’t like playing that game. Whereas the HSA, it does accumulate over time. So you don’t have to use it. So the money goes in cash and then for some HSAs, you can invest it dollar one or maybe you have to wait for you to have a balance of $1,000 and then you can invest above $1,000. It just depends on the HSA. But it allows you — it’s very similar to an IRA in a sense of how you invest it. Now, the main thing for this, it has a triple tax benefit. So what I mean by that is for the IRAs, we were talking about a double tax benefit. You either get a tax break going in or going out. And it grows tax-free. With the HSA, there’s a triple tax benefit, meaning that you get a deduction — and it doesn’t matter how much money you make. So you could make $10 million a year, and you’d still get this deduction. You get a deduction as it goes in, it grows tax-free, and then it comes out tax-free if it’s used for qualifying medical expenses or once you reach age 65, you can use it for really whatever you want. So for a lot of people, they use this is as almost like another IRA bucket, which is what my household uses it for to get that. So it never sees the IRS. It never sees the taxman, if you do it correctly. So you can put up to $3,550 as an individual, $7,100 as a family, and then there’s a catchup after age 55, I believe. So you know, the advantages, the advantages of this is obviously the tax treatment, it’s another bucket that if you’re a little bit higher income that you don’t get some of the tax breaks like the traditional IRA deduction, you can put money in there. So what we try to do as a family is we fund this first and then we try to cash flow our health expenses as best we can.

Tim Ulbrich: So that’s the traditional IRA, Roth IRA, HSA. Talk to us about us about the SEP IRA.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the SEP IRA out there is typically for those self-employed pharmacists out there or maybe ones that are running a side business or could be they work for a small business owner that has a SEP IRA as their sole retirement plan. So they look and act very similar to a traditional IRA, but they’re kind of like a super IRA because the contribution limits are a lot higher. So this is an employer-sponsored IRA, so if you work for a company that has a SEP, you don’t put any money into it at all, and you can’t put any money into it at all. The employer basically has to put — and they’re not necessarily as popular once you start getting employees just because there’s flexibility on when, you know, so you don’t have to contribute to it every year. So if you have a down year because of COVID or whatever, the business owner could say, “Hey, I don’t want to contribute this year.” But next year when business starts to pick up, you have to contribute at the same rate as you contribute to yourself. So if I put 10% in for what I make, you have to do the same for your employees. So typically the rules here, eligible employees have to be at least 21, they have to work for the employer at least three out of the last five years, they have to earn at least $600. So if you’re the employee and the owner, so if you’re one and the same person, this is kind of what I used early on in my business, a SEP, to basically save for retirement above and beyond the traditional IRA. So you can typically put in like the lesser of 25% or up to $57,000 as of 2020. So the hard part about this — and one of the disadvantages — it’s really hard because you’re really looking at what the business profits are to kind of gauge what you can put in. So in my experience, I would put money aside and then like on tax day when I had all those numbers, then that’s when I would kind of check the SEP IRA. So long story short, the IRA is just typically used for those self-employed, if you’re running a side business, you might be able to shelter a little bit of the business income there to help from a tax perspective, from a Schedule C perspective. But there’s no Roth component or anything like that. So there are some disadvantages.

Tim Ulbrich: So we have lots of tax advantage savings vehicles. So obviously the 401k or the 403b, traditional IRA, Roth IRA, HSA, SEP IRA, so as we talk for a moment about taxable brokerage accounts, not only what are they but what would their role be, considering that we have all of these other options available?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the taxable account — and we can kind of talk about this in kind of the mistakes that I see — but the taxable account is often — think of it as like a savings account but on steroids. So instead of in the savings account that money just sits in cash and maybe earns an interest rate, in a taxable account, you can actually convert that cash into shares of an investment, you know, Facebook stock or S&P 500 ETF or a mutual fund, and then that’s where you start earning the capital appreciation, the dividends, etc. So the contributions here, it’s really unlimited. So you know, you can put a couple bucks a year into it or millions of dollars a year. It’s really — the world’s your oyster. Same thing with the investments: You can basically invest in whatever you want. There’s restrictions like you see in some of the retirement plans. You typically use this when you’ve exhausted your retirement contributions to some of these other accounts that we’ve talked about or if you say, “Hey, Tim, I want to retire at age 55,” a lot of these accounts, the IRA, the 401k, they’re going to say, “Hey, you’re going to be penalized to take money out until you reach this kind of arbitrary age of 59.5 years old. So if I retire at 55, I can’t get that money out of the 401k without a penalty. So when you might use this account for like near — like kind of the beginning phases of retirement and then shift — when you get to age 60, shift over. The other use for this is my wife and I use this for a future car purchase is we see where rates are and how the saver is taking a beating now because interest rates are so low. So we say, alright, we can use this taxable account, we’ll put a car payment worth every month into a taxable account and hopefully over the next five years, the average investment return in the S&P 500 is about 6-7%. Hopefully we can get that versus the 1% that we’re getting in our high-yield savings account. So it’s more of a near- to medium-term goal, which could be a home purchase, a car purchase, maybe real estate investing, investment, with the caveat that you could lose that investment. So you know, there’s risk there that you’re taking. So big advantages in terms of flexibility, there’s no penalty to withdraw, you can recognize losses to offset gains. So this is where you’re paying capital gains, whether they’re short-term or long-term. So when you buy that share at $100 and sell it for $400 in a taxable account, you’re paying $300 in capital gains per share. And so that is one of the disadvantages to the taxable account.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, we started by talking about the nest egg, what you need, and then we talked about the importance of investing and taking advantage of compound interest to get there, and then we talked about the vehicles that are available to get there, lots of different ones. So then the next question is, OK, well how do I prioritize this? I’ve got some dollars that I want to save each and every month towards my long-term savings goals to get to that nest egg and take advantage of compound interest. But with all of these options available, where do I go and in what order? And so this takes me back to Episode 073, where we talked about the priority of investing and we talked about the order in which we think you should consider filling your long-term savings or retirement buckets. And it’s important to say, as with any other part of the financial plan, this has to be tailored to the individual. So of course, this is not investment advice. But walk us through again, Tim, at a high level what we think of as the priority of investing between these different vehicles that are available to someone.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so assuming that we have kind of the foundation in place, the consumer debt is kind of taken care of, emergency fund, we don’t owe any taxes, we have a plan for the student loans, we’re kind of accounting for more of the near-term goals like travel, wedding, home purchase, education planning for the kids, really as we kind of wade into the how you prioritize, it’s going to depend. Obviously that’s my statement answer, but in most cases what we would say is you want to start with the employer match. That is — we talk about that’s free money in 99% of cases. 95% of cases, you always want to get, at least get the match so you don’t forego that benefit. And then typically, the next step, the decision tree here is based on if my — how great or not so great my retirement plan is. So you know, in a lot of cases, retirement plans, 401k’s, 403b’s, they have a lot of fees associated that the investor doesn’t necessarily see. So what we typically say is that if you don’t know, it might be good to go out into the IRA/HSA world and max those out next. And then go back into the 401k, the 403b, the TSP and get the max, which is in 2020 $19,500. And then from there, from a traditional investment perspective, that’s when you would start loading up in the taxable account or if you’re more nontraditional, you might look at real estate investment, investing in businesses, or something like that. So that’s typically kind of steps 1, 2, 3 and then 4 with regard to how to kind of prioritize your approach to filling your retirement buckets.

Tim Ulbrich: And you talked about one of these already, but common mistakes that you see people make in the investment prioritization, but talk us through some others that you commonly see as well as people are trying to sort out these different options.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, often when I come across — and I had a conversation with a pharmacist here recently. You know, they get into investing before the debt is paid or there’s a plan for the debt. So that could be a student loan, that could be a credit card or a personal loan. So you know, you have $10,000 in credit card debt, but you’re putting 10% in — you get a 5% and you get a 10%, and you have a 10% contribution into your — you know, that doesn’t really make any sense. Or sometimes there’s no purpose or goal with the investment. So most of these accounts that we’ve talked about are retirement accounts, so they’re for retirement. But if you have taxable accounts, I often ask clients that have like a Robinhood account or — what’s the other one? Robinhood and…

Tim Ulbrich: Acorn?

Tim Baker: Acorn. And I’m like, what’s this account for? And they’re like, I don’t know. And to me, I think that’s dangerous — not dangerous, but just to me, I’d like to say, “OK, my wife and I, we have a taxable account, which is like Robinhood in terms of the same tax treatment. But it’s for real estate, it’s for a trip to Australia.” And sometimes we do the taxable accounts before we even get the match, we have an emergency fund in place. And I know why that happens. It happens — and I think you, Tim, and I can appreciate this — is because you’re interested, you’re curious, you want to see how some of these apps or like the investment works. And it feels good to invest in Tesla or Disney or Ford or whatever. But it’s kind of putting the cart before the horse. So in a lot of cases, we kind of advise clients, like, hey, you need a $30,000 emergency fund. Right now, you have $10,000. You have $30,000 in the taxable account. Let’s do the math here and figure that out. Another mistake is just having no concept — I know we’re not talking about it today — but no concept of how good or bad their 401k and 403b is, which that’s tough because it is very opaque to the investor, unfortunately. And then probably the last thing is just kind of having that 401k inertia where they just stick it at the match and then they wake up and they’re 45 and they’re still just putting it at 3% or 5%. So some of that investment, some of the mistakes I see with kind of the prioritization is kind of outlined there.

Tim Ulbrich: And you mentioned, Tim, earlier I think an important part about risk tolerance and understanding how that fits into your investment selection, your long-term goals. So how do you work through this with clients in terms of understanding the risk tolerance and then ultimately developing a portfolio that aligns with that.

Tim Baker: I kind of look at risk tolerance as — so you really have two things going on here. You have the risk tolerance, and then you have what’s called risk capacity. So risk tolerance is the amount of risk that you want to take. So in the case study that we went through earlier in this episode, we talked about Conservative Jane. So Conservative Jane didn’t want to take any risk at all, didn’t want to. The risk capacity is the amount of risk that you need to take or the amount of risk that you can take. So for some people, you know, if they’re age 50, they want to retire at age 60-65 and they haven’t done the things that they need to do throughout the course of their career and they’re a little bit behind, you need to take a little bit more risk to kind of make up for lost time. The other example is if you’re 30 years old and you’re going to retire at 65, you have 35 years, so you can take more risk because you just have a longer time horizon. So we measure the risk tolerance but then we talk about the risk capacity. And what I kind of say is — and I would say it’s not very common, but kind of the rules of thumb out there where you say, alright, you take your age and you sub — so say I’m 30 years old and I subtract that from 100, that’s 70. So the rule of thumb is you put 70% in equities and 30% in bonds. And I think that is utterly terrible. That’s a terrible rule of thumb. And I love those rules of thumbs and making it easier. But it’s — I think it’s the wrong advice. So to me, what I argue is if you have decades worth of time, 20-30 years, you really shouldn’t have many bonds in your portfolio at all, if any. So as an example, I’m — how old am I? — I’m going to be 38 this year, Tim.

Tim Ulbrich: Old. Old.

Tim Baker: Yeah. I’m getting up there. But I’m not going to smell bonds in my portfolio for another 20 years probably because, you know, right? And it sounds weird, but like when COVID happened and the market went down, like I never looked at my balances. I don’t care. And the reason I don’t care is because I’m not going to spend that money for another 25 years, 30 years. So in 25 or 30 years, we’ll probably remember COVID, but we’re not going to remember what our balances were there. So now if you’re 60 and you’re going to retire next year or in a couple years, then you do care. And that’s where we start shifting from an equity portfolio to more of a bond portfolio where it’s more safety in principle and you’re protecting what you’ve built over the course of your career. So that’s important. And that’s, again, something that when we talk about, when we change that one variable between Conservative Jane and Aggressive Jane, if you’re willing to kind of join me on that ride — and it can be bumpy — but the market goes up, then you just have to save less hard, if that makes sense. Because your money’s just going to go a lot further, and a lot of people get that wrong.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I remember when Jess and I were working through this with you, Tim, I remember taking an assessment that we each did that helped us understand our own risk tolerance but then also stimulated a great discussion between the three of us about OK, let’s take that information and then let’s also look at that in the context of our nest egg and our goals and everything else that we want to do. And I think that’s exactly how this process should work. So I want to talk about taxes for a moment. And we talk often because we so firmly believe that tax strategy and planning is ideal when it’s paired up with the financial planning in the process. So we are fortunate to have Paul Eichenberg, our IRS-enrolled agent, on the YFP Planning team to help our clients that are also working with our Certified Financial Planners. But as we look at the tax piece here in the context of investing — and we’ve talked a little bit about it already — but paint that picture for us. Why is the tax consideration and having that input so valuable as we are looking at it through the lens of the investments?

Tim Baker: Yeah, you know, just coming from the beach, it’s like tax is like the sand. Like it gets into everything, right? So it’s everywhere.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s good.

Tim Baker: And you have to consider that. And I’ll give you — I’ll kind of give you a real-world example. I was having a meeting with a client we’ve been working with forever and we were talking about his Roth IRA and some of the other things. And we’re not doing his taxes right now. I think he has a family member that does it. And I said, “Hey, let’s at least upload your tax returns so we can kind of take a look and see how everything’s doing and see if I can give you some advice.” And we found out that his AGI, it was actually too high for him to be making Roth contributions. So we’re going to have to basically back those contributions out, you know, put them into as a nondeductible contribution in the traditional IRA and then figure out a way to convert them. So you know, it’s going to cost him. There’s going to be a penalty and things like that. And it’s just one of the — this was the year that he kind of went over that threshold. He was working a lot of overtime, etc. So you know, so those types of things happen. But what I say to clients is like, look, most financial planners, they don’t do taxes. So in my last firm, we would say, “Hey, client, we don’t do taxes. But you know, go work with a CPA,” and then there was really no cross-planning between the two of us. And I think you leave a lot on the table when you do that or you potentially can run into some of the cases like I was telling here today. So my big pitch to the client that I just mentioned was like, hey, let’s just roll it up in with us. Let’s do it. Fire your aunt or whoever that’s doing it and let us do it because it’s just — it’s that important. So I think whether it’s something like the Roth contribution or just when to convert things, it’s just for everything, every financial decision that is involved typically has some type of tax implications. And what I’ve found, at least in my experience, is that similar to like the student loans, most financial planners don’t really understand student loans, most financial planners are not going to basically file the taxes and do the associated planning that is kind of need through every walk of life with regard to the financial plan. So that’s why we’ve kind of rolled that up into our service. And I think it just makes it — it allows us to have more robust conversations and cover more bases with regard to the journey that we’re on.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great stuff, Tim. And we preach and hopefully model with our clients the importance of both the filing aspects as well as the strategy and the planning. And so our clients have the opportunity to work closely not only with you and Robert and the rest of the team but also with Paul to be able to make sure that that tax piece is closely integrated with the rest of the financial plan. So as we wrap up here, Tim, with everything that we have talked through here as it relates to investing, and from my experience, there is huge value for having a financial coach. And we know that investing is a huge part of the financial plan, as we started with. It’s only one part. And like we talked about, it’s essential for helping folks, me and others, increase their nest egg and ultimately achieve their long-term financial goals. And I know firsthand from my experience for Jess and I having you on our side as our coach to guide us through our options and help us assess our risk tolerance and ultimately put together that savings plan has been so critical. So for those that are listening that say, “Hey, I want a coach in my corner. I want somebody to help me guide me through not only the investing part of the financial plan but the rest of the plan and the ins and outs of each part of the plan,” talk to us more about not only where do folks go to ultimately have a conversation with you but also the offering and the service of what we do at YFP Planning.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the best way to — if someone’s listening to this and they’re like, hey, that sounds really something that I need in my life, they can go to YourFinancialPharmacist.com and at the top right, there’s a “Book Free Financial Planning Call.” And you’ll see an appointment calendar where you’ll see my ugly mug and then also you, Tim Ulbrich, that we can have conversations about potentially working together. Or I think if you go to YFPPlanning.com is our other website, you can book a meeting that way. And those are free of charge. It’s really hey, this is us, who are you, let’s learn more about it and see if we would be potentially a good fit. You know, I think when — the way that I look at financial planning is I don’t really even look at it as like financial planning. I really look at our service as a life plan that is supported by a financial plan. So I often say, you know, we were talking about that nest egg as like, hey, you need $4 or $5 million in your nest egg, you know, let’s suppose that we work together for the next 20 or 30 years and we have $10 million in the nest egg. $10 million is better than $4 or $5 million. However, if you’re miserable because you haven’t done the things that you wanted to do in life, you feel like you don’t get fulfillment from your career, you haven’t traveled, whatever those goals are, whatever — we talk about the why — whatever that why is, who cares? Like what’s the point? What’s the point of making a six-figure income, what’s the point of becoming a Seven Figure Pharmacist, what’s the point of paying — like what’s the point if you’re not happy, if you’re not fulfilled? So to me, the hard part — so we’ve kind of gotten into some of the technical pieces today with regard to investing outside of the 401k, but to me the hard part about this is the human element.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: It’s the how do we thread the needle between taking care of you, the listener that’s listening out there today, but then you the listener who’s 10, 20, 30 years older that things are completely different. So it’s threading the needle between taking care of yourself today and your future self. And that is hard, especially if you’re doing it with a partner, working with you and Jess, my wife, I mean, you just have different opinions about money and there’s compromise and things like that. So to me, we go into lots of different pieces of the financial plan and we kind of rattle off a bunch of them, but at the end of the day what we want to see — our mantra really is are we helping the client grow and protect income, which is the lifeblood of the financial plan? Without the income, nothing moves. So sometimes we kind of like poo-poo the six-figure income, that’s going to solve all your problems. It is good to have, but we want to be intentional. So how can we help you grow and protect the income, and then more importantly, grow and protect the net worth, which means increasing the assets efficiently, which includes the investments, but then also decreasing the liabilities efficiently, which includes things like student loans, paying off the house, etc. So assets minus your liabilities equal your net worth. So income and net worth quantitatively are the two most important numbers. And we track the net worth over time to show progress. But then it goes back to the who cares unless we’re keeping the goals in mind. And those are the qualitative aspect that we really have to pair. So you know, it’s not uncommon for me to say, hey client, we talked about this trip to Australia. We’ve been working together for 12, 18, 2 years, whatever that 12-18 months, maybe two years — and again, keep COVID in mind — but I’ll say, “Where’s the money? We haven’t done that yet, but where’s the money for that?” Either it’s important and we want to be intentionally saving towards that goal and check that off because when I asked you the questions of like hey, what are we trying to do? You said hey, that’s something that came to mind. So it must be important. Or maybe it’s not anymore. And then we’ll adjust the plan accordingly. So how can we help you grow and protect income, the net worth, while keeping your goals in mind? That’s our jam.

Tim Ulbrich: I love it. And again, YFPPlanning.com, you can book a free discovery call to see if it’s a good fit for you, good fit for us. And if we’re not already yet a part of the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group and our community of more than 6,000 pharmacy professionals that are answering questions, encouraging one another, challenging one another, I hope you will join us in that community. And as always, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to your show each and every week. Have a great rest of your day.

 

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 162: Credit 101


Credit 101

Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker, CFP® dig into credit, a not so exciting but incredibly important part of the financial plan. They talk about what makes up a credit score, the impact of good (or poor) credit, how to find and interpret your credit score, the difference between hard vs soft credit checks and how to protect your credit.

Summary

Assessing your credit report and credit score are integral pieces of the financial planning services offered at YFP, but why? The CFP® board focuses on several different topics like budget, taxes, insurance, retirement and estate planning, but YFP Planning expands that list to support clients with essentially any aspect of their life that carries a dollar sign. On this podcast episode, Tim Baker breaks down credit, its misperceptions and what factors go into your credit score.

Tim explains that credit starts with you and your behavior and that agencies create credit reports based on what they get from creditors, like loan servicers or credit card companies. A credit score is created from this record of payments and essentially shows a snapshot of your reliability or likelihood of paying debts on time. You’re then able to use your credit score to apply for more credit. Your credit score matters because it affects if you can get more credit and how much you pay for that credit (i.e. interest).

Tim also shares the 6 factors that go into a credit score. The high impact factors are credit card utilization, payment history and derogatory marks. Medium impact factors include age of credit and your total number of accounts. Finally, a hard inquiry (think applying for a credit card or mortgage) has a low impact on your credit.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. And today, Tim Baker and I are going to be talking all about credit. So Tim Baker, welcome back to the show.

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think it’s been awhile since I’ve been on a full like episode, so it’s good to be back.

Tim Ulbrich: It is. I feel like every time we do this, we say that and then we say we’re going to do more of it, and then, you know, it ends up being awhile. But we are going to do more of it in the future, and we have been doing more of it with the Ask a YFP CFP segment of the podcast. So Tim, credit as it relates to the financial plan. And with YFP Financial Planning clients, credit is a presentation, it’s a module that you walk through. And I think many people may not think about this as a core part of the financial plan and perhaps not even covered by many financial planners. So talk to us about why is credit such a big part of our financial planning services that we offer? And what’s really the goal of talking to clients about this topic?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think there is — you know, I kind of look at the financial plan. I mean, you have the core pieces that the CFP board teaches and there’s curriculum for that. And that’s the things that we talk about, which are kind of budgeting, cash flow, your balance sheet, tax, insurance, investment, retirement planning, estate planning. Those are the things that are — you know, debt management, not necessarily student debt but overall debt management — so those are the things that we kind of talk about as core to the financial plan. And we kind of — we do those things, you know, at YFP Planning, but we also have kind of adapted our service to talk about more things that are kind of top of mind for a lot of our clients and kind of what they’re experiencing. So those are things like hey Tim, I’m buying a home. What do I do? And you know, very much related to that is credit, you know, is making sure that the credit is pristine and looking good. It could be planning for a kid’s education, salary negotiation, things like that. So we kind of — real estate investing, most financial planners are not going to get into real estate investing because they’re not necessarily paid on the assets that are in real estate portfolios. So we kind of drift a little bit to kind adapt our service. And I would say credit is one that a lot of people don’t think about. But we often do it in tandem with the home purchase, so say, “Hey, if you’re going to make the biggest purchase of your life,” — and I’ll put it in and edit on that because I have clients that are like, “Well, the biggest purchase of my life is my pharmacy, my PharmD.” And I’m like, “OK, if you’re going to make the biggest purchase of your life at one time, you want to make sure that you get the — you have the best, you know, your credit is as best it can be and you get the best terms.” So a lot of people — and I can say, you know, we talk about mistakes that we’ve made in the past. I know, like in past life, I was afraid that my credit score — and I never really checked my credit, so I remember renting an apartment way back when, this was kind of when I was getting out of the Army and I’m like, I wasn’t always as great a saver and I would carry credit card debt and all that kind of stuff. And I would be scared because they were like, “Hey, we’re going to run a credit report.” I’m like, oh my goodness, like my credit’s probably looking — and I had no idea what it was. And I’m like, I was almost apologizing for my credit score, not knowing what it was. And I think it came back, it was like in the 800s. So in a lot of ways, credit is a good measure of your dependability and reliability and kind of your overall financial health. But also like not really because you can have a fantastic credit score but also be not necessarily positive on the balance sheet, you know, and things like that or at least moving in a positive direction. So we definitely look at this as a key piece of the financial plan and make sure that — and I really break it down into two pieces. You have your credit — you know, when we talk about credit, we have your credit score. And you have your credit report. And those are the things that we kind of break down and then we go into things like identity theft. But those are the two main pieces that we kind of work through.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I’m glad you said that, Tim, you know, that we shouldn’t confuse a good credit score with necessarily meaning that that’s — that you have a sound financial position or situation. Maybe that’s true.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: We hope that’s true. But you know, as we’ll talk about how credit scores are determined, you know, that may or may not connect with your net worth, that may or may not connect with your debt position, your asset position.

Tim Baker: Sure.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think I would encourage folks too, I’ve made plenty of financial mistakes. But one of the mistakes that I made related to credit is I underestimated the importance of credit based on my situation in the moment. So you know, I can think of several years ago right after we paid off our student loan debt where I really wasn’t worried about, you know, having a sound credit history. We did, but being able to continue to maintain that because I had really thought, hey, we’ve got no more debt, what’s really the need for credit going forward? We already purchased our home. But I think that speaks to a common situation that people may fall into similar to ours where you look at your financial situation for the future through the lens of what you’re doing today, right?

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: And not think about what about a future home purchase? What about a real estate investment purchase? What about starting a business in the future? What about x, y, or z that may be important to be able to have that credit down the line? So thinking about where the future may go as well. So you mentioned, Tim, two important pieces here: credit report, credit score. So let’s jump into those both in more detail. And let’s talk about the credit report first. So where do you pull a credit report? What does it show? And why is it important to check it?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I would say even before we get into that, I kind of want to back up and kind of just talk about like how really how the credit system works. So it really kind of starts with you and your behaviors. So where — how you’re getting credit, where you’re — so if we kind of walk through a scenario, let’s pretend, Tim, that you’re saying OK, hey, I want to buy a car. You’re going to go to the Honda dealership, the Toyota dealership, the Ford dealership or whatever, and say you don’t have the cash to pay. As most don’t. You’re going to basically put a note on the car. So the creditor, they’re going to say, “Hey, we’re going to lend you this $20,000. And every month, you’re going to pay this back with an interest rate.” So basically, your behavior of what you’re doing with Toyota or Honda or Visa or your student loans, your creditors are going to be reporting that back, you know, your payments, every month to these different reporting agencies. So the reporting agencies are Equifax, Transunion, Experian. And then these agencies are going to be taking all of that information that are sourced by the creditors and essentially they create these credit reports, which is just kind of a record of your — of kind of your payments based on what the creditors are telling them. And then from there, they create this credit score, which is basically a snapshot of your reliability or your likelihood that you’re going to pay your debts back on time. And then if we kind of bring this back full-circle, you then use your credit score to then apply for more credit. So it’s like this cyclical thing that happens with regard to the how credit works. Now, if we talked about the credit report first, the credit report, again, is a record sourced by the creditors of an individual’s different credit, you know, loan payments, etc. One of the misconceptions, it doesn’t show your credit score. So a lot of people — when I’ll ask clients, “Hey, have you run your credit report?” they assume that their credit score is there, and it’s not. So back in 2003, Congress passed the FACT Act, the Fair and Accurate Credit Transaction Act that gives free access to credit reports but not necessarily free access to your credit score. So every year, every 12 months, you can run a credit report from each of the three major credit reporting companies. Right now with the CARES Act, you can actually run this report weekly.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: Which is interesting. And sometimes needed, given what’s going on with some of the student loan services. We talked about that in the past. So to quickly break down the credit report, when you run your credit report — and you can do that at freeannualcreditreport.com I believe it is. Sorry, it’s annualcreditreport.com. So you can go there and you can see all the different credit reporting agencies and you can pick the one that you like. I like Transunion’s. It’s colorful, so they’re all essentially the same. But Transunion is kind of a prettier version. So you can pick Transunion. And I would say don’t run them all at the same time. Just run one. If you have a big discrepancy when we talk about credit score, then maybe run another one. So when you run your credit report, basically the things that you’re going to be looking at is kind of your pertinent information, so your name, maybe aliases, your birth date, your addresses. I joke that if I ever — so I’ve lived all over the country. If I ever forget like, OK, what was the address that I had in like southern California when I lived there, I look at Amazon and I look at my credit report because those are typically the best places for that. And then it might show like your occupation and things like that, but the bulk, the meat of the credit report is going to be your account information. So it’s going to show first any adverse accounts, so these are things that have like negative, like a negative report associated with that, so like a missed payment or something of that sort. And then all of your satisfactory accounts, so these are accounts in good standings with no blemishes at all. So that’s really kind of the — and you’ll see, like when you look at it, you’ll be like, oh yeah, I forgot about that account or this account’s been closed for five years but it’s still going to show on your credit report for a total of 10. So it’s kind of a little bit of a trip down memory lane, but it’s a good exercise to pull their credit report, to look at it. We do that on behalf of clients. But I even tell clients, like I’m not going to know if something looks kind of fishy or out of whack because, again, I wasn’t there. But I can kind of still look and provide feedback and overall advice on how to better improve the credit report.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, so again, annualcreditreport.com. You can do that once per year for free through each of the three agencies. Although as you mentioned here, in the CARES Act time period, you can do that more often. And we’d certainly challenge and encourage our listeners that have not done, I think it’s a great exercise, for the reasons that you mentioned, but also just another way that you can be engaged and involved in your financial plan as we talk about credit being an important part of the financial plan. So Tim, you talked about one misconception around credit, which is that your report does not include your score. Those are two different things. What are some other common misperceptions that you hear about credit that we can debunk right now before we go into talking about credit scores?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so some people think that like, oh, if I check my credit, it’s going to drop. And that’s not true at all. Like you know, the government actually wants you — like before, you had to pay for your credit report. Now, they’re giving you free access. Another big thing is closing — and some of this sounds like counterintuitive — but like closing an old account improves your credit score. And in fact, I actually just had this happen in one of mine. I had a very old credit card that I think I used when I was at West Point that eventually, it eventually like closed because I just stopped using it. And my age — so we’ll talk about different factors that affect your credit score — age of credit is going to be one of those. So that longstanding account that was open basically cut my age of credit in half, which lowered my credit score. So that’s another big one. You know, another thing is like, hey, if I have a missing payment on a credit card and I have a derogatory mark, if I basically get that back to where it’s good to go, then that comes off my credit. And that’s not true. Like I had a — I think it was back in 20 — and I actually show it on my credit report when I go through this with clients. Back in May of 2010, I went 30 days over — like I didn’t pay my credit card and it went 30 — once it hits 31 days, then it basically is a derogatory mark. That stayed on my credit report until May of 2017. So it can be — some of those things can be very long in terms of them coming off.

Tim Ulbrich: This was the old Tim Baker, right?

Tim Baker: Yeah, this was the old Tim Baker. I actually want to go back to my calendar and see what was going on. I’m pretty — and I kind of joke, you know, the two things that — and I wouldn’t say it’s just two things, but the two main things that my parents taught me about money growing up was don’t have credit card debt, like pay those off, and then like buy a house, that’s a good investment. And I obviously didn’t listen to that first one 100% of the time. So but that derogatory mark stayed on my credit report, you know, for seven years. So you know, this is where we talk about like autopayment and things like that. Like don’t — make sure that you’re — and for some people, some people, they’re like, ah, 30 days, they just throw up their hands. And then the next 30 days, that’s another derogatory mark. And then there goes the 90 day, that’s another. So you don’t want to let those cascade. And then probably another one is like being a cosigner doesn’t make you responsible for the account. That’s exactly what it does. So lenders like cosigners because it’s two different people that they could potentially revert back to if the credit goes — if the loan goes into default. So that’s exactly what that does. So that, you know, you’ve got to look at that from a some people are like, oh, yeah, well I’ll cosign for my brother’s car note or my kid’s or things like that. You’ve got to be wary of that because at the end of the day, you want to protect yourself — you want to help loved ones, but you also want to protect yourself in terms of your credit. And probably the last one that, you know, you hear is like, well, if I pay off this debt, my credit is going to be boost by 50, 100 points. And it’s not — there’s just so many different — it’s not a linear relationship. There’s so many different factors that go into your credit score that it’s going to depend on a variety of things of how your credit score is going to move.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think that last point’s a good segway into what is a credit score and what makes that up so you can have an understanding how any one decision may or may not move the needle very much based on the components and the percentage that they make up of that overall score. So give us the broad definition of a credit score.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the credit score is really a number that summarizes your credit risk based on a snapshot of your credit report at a particular point in time. It’s really the picture of your ability to pay back a loan over really the next two or three years. So the higher your credit score, the more likely you’ll be able to pay back the loan and on time. And really, the credit score matters because it affects whether you can get credit and what you pay for credit, meaning if you have a higher credit score, then you can potentially get better rates. A higher score, you know, will more than likely be more chance of approval for that credit. It can affect your ability to rent an apartment. Sometimes it affects your ability for your deposit on a telephone, a utility, that type of thing. And a lot of employers will run credit scores just as kind of a measure of your dependability. So it can have far-reaching effects. So you know, if we look at kind of the different bands on credit — so like some people will say, oh, like my credit score is only 760. Like that’s a really good — in essence, that’s an excellent credit score. So anything about 750 is excellent. Good is kind of the 700-749. Fair is 650 to basically 699. And it goes all the way down to poor then bad credit. So this is a really, really important score. And if you look at it from the — I try to look at it from both sides of it. So you look at it from the lender’s perspective, you know, when, you know — and we talk about this like, we kind of talk about this with like interviewing like candidates and things like that, you’re trying to really get a good snapshot of this person and by answering a series of questions or something like that. And from a credit granting decision, the lender is really trying to get a good snapshot of how hey, if we, you know, if we’re going to take risks to lend you this $300,000 for a home, we want a good feel that you’re going to be able to pay this back and on time. And from their perspective, they’re using that as a way to, you know, sum up your dependability.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I don’t want to brush over — you mentioned it — but not only impacting your ability to get credit but what you pay for that credit. I think that’s so incredibly important when you talk about big purchases like a home. And we talked about this in Episode 159 with the refi and, you know, what is the difference of a point or point and a half? And that can be due to credit and how attractive you are as a lendee. But obviously that has significant impacts on your monthly budget as well as over the life of the loan, student loan refi, car buying, the list really goes on and on, real estate investing and so forth.

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: So you mentioned the number and the ranges that we see in a credit score. We talked a little bit about why it matters, what it can impact, the various parts of your plan. Talk to us about the new FICO credit score effective January 2020.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so they’re trying to like tweak the system a bit to kind of make it more of a reflection of like a borrower’s behavior. So one of the things that they changed at the beginning of the year — and FICO is the biggest credit score out there. I think Vantage is the next one. But FICO’s the big one on the block. They’re trying to tweak their algorithms, so they’re going to judge more harshly those who fall behind on payments. And what they’re trying to do is give more weight to people that are basically improving their credit situation. So they’re looking at more like trended data. So the example I’ll give is let’s pretend that you have $40,000 in credit card debt, and we work with clients that have $40,000 in credit card debt. And let’s pretend that over the year, the first year that we’re working with them, that $40,000 moves to $20,000 as an example. And then we basically compare that to another client that we’re working with that just basically has we’ll say $5,000 in credit but at the end of the first year, they still have $5,000 in credit balances that they’re carrying. The first client would actually be, you know, graded out a little bit better because they’ve gone from $40,000 and their trended data says they’re moving in the right direction in terms of paying off their credit whereas the other client, which we’re kind of just saying they’re treading water, their balances are the same, would be graded more harshly. So today, that second client, that $5,000 is — before we made the changes would have a better credit rating whereas the one that’s trending in the right direction now is they’re giving more consideration to that, which is good. I think the other thing that they were looking at changing is to kind of — you can play a little bit of a smoke-and-mirrors game with credit. So if I had $40,000 in credit card debt and I moved that to an unsecured personal loan, that actually helped my credit score out quite a bit. So now, for those types of loans where you’re kind of just shifting it from a credit card debt to a personal loan, it’s still graded similar to how like a credit card would be. So they’re recognizing that there’s a lot of people that will consolidate credit card debt into other types of debt. And they don’t — they want to make sure that they’re capturing that data accordingly.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Tim Baker: So they’re going to continue to — it’s not a perfect system at all. But you know, they’re trying different ways to make sure that they’re capturing overall behavior and where a particular borrower is trending with regard to their credit decisions.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think that makes sense in terms of the trends and, you know — I think about this in terms of like when we admit student into the PharmD program, you’re looking at the whole picture, but often the best indicator of their success going forward is the most recent behavior. So you know, if you see somebody really struggled academically in their first or second year of undergrad but they’ve significantly improved in their third and fourth year, obviously that’s an indicator of where they’re going to go, even though overall, they may not be as competitive as some students who did average throughout. So let’s talk about a credit score and how it’s calculated. So how is a credit score calculated? What factors are considered in this calculation? And what’s considered high impact versus lower impact?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so there’s really six different factors that kind of go into your credit score. So we’ll start with the high impact ones. So really, there’s high impact ones. The first one is credit card utilization. So the credit card utilization is — it’s basically the amount of credit that you’re carrying month-to-month. So if we say that — and really, this is a high-impact factor. The lower the utilization, the better. So lenders like to see that you’re not using too much of your available credit. So the more you use, the harder it is to pay off. So the idea is to keep the balances low. So the example I give is let’s pretend that you have a line of credit on your credit cards of $10,000. So if you’re carrying $3,000 worth of credit card balances every month, then your utilization is basically 30%. And that, you’d be right in the middle of the pack. That’s kind of a fair credit utilization rate. So the idea here is that to be excellent, you want to have basically under 10%. So in that case, the borrower, if they want to have an excellent credit card utilization, it would be carrying $1,000 or less. Now obviously we’re big believers in just paying off the credit card every month. But that’s a big one is that lenders like to see that you have a little bit of rope but you’re not using all of it. The second one is kind of the payment history. So lenders look at this factor to determine how likely you’ll make future payments on time. So that’s like not being like me and making sure that 100% of the time you’re paying your debts back and on time. So you want to be aware of lateness, you want to set up things like automatic bill pay, those types of things and not let those latenesses cascade. And for you to be excellent, you really want to be 100% effective. Good is 99%, fair is 98%. And you’re going to say, “Wow, Tim, that’s like, that’s really tough.” But if you think about it, you know, think about like if you were to pay off a student debt, like let’s pretend you refinanced your loans a couple years ago and you made your last payment in July of 2020. Those payments and that account is going to stay on your credit report for 10 years. So it’s not going to come off until July of 2030. So if you add up all of these different accounts and all of these monthly transactions, like the denominator is very large. So you know, even if you do make — miss a payment, you’re still going to be in that high 90s. Probably the last high-impact factor is derogatory marks. These are basically the result of things like a late payment or if you go to collections or have a bankruptcy. The derogatory marks are going to be anything that’s adverse that a creditor is going to want to know. So this is high impact. The lower, the better. And again, these are where you want to make sure that you’re keeping all of your accounts in good standing and they’re not basically moving from an account in good standing to an adverse account. The other ones are going to be — so the age of credit is more of a medium impact. So the higher or the longer, the better. So they’re looking at really 9+ years. So this is where some people, some younger clients get penalized. I actually had a client that was — I think she was 28. And her age of credit was like 38 years old, or 38 years. And I was like, what’s going? And I think her parents put her on like a Conoco gas card as like a user or whatever. And that like really helped her credit history. So lenders like to see that really it’s not your first rodeo, you have experience using credit. So you can improve your age of credit by keeping accounts open and in good standing. The next one is total accounts. So I thought this was — like when I was learning about credit way back in the day, I thought this was a little bit of counterintuitive. Actually, the total accounts, higher is better. So lenders like to see that you’re using various accounts. So it could be installment accounts, so loans paid in fixed increments over a period of time. So take like a car loan, a student loan, a mortgage. It could be revolving credit, so credit lines that have variable payments. So think of like a credit card, an open credit line, which could be things that are balances that need to be paid every month. So think of like a utility or a cell phone bill. So it suggests that — it’s kind of a little bit of the herd mentality. It suggests that other lenders have trusted you before, so we can trust you as well. So they like to see, you know, lots of different — and for you to be in the upper echelon here, excellent is like 21 accounts or more. And you’re thinking like, wow, that’s a lot. For pharmacists, this is typically a piece of cake because everytime your loans are disbursed, so think like per semester, that’s an account. So pharmacists usually have a really easy time of getting this, even if they don’t have credit cards or things like that, they typically have a lot of accounts listed on their credit report.

Tim Ulbrich: Unfortunately.

Tim Baker: Yeah, unfortunately. And then finally, the last one. And this is a lower utilization as like a hard inquiry. So this is lower is better. This results in applying for credit. So the idea here is that they don’t want people that necessarily don’t have great credit to kind of be fishing for credit like all over town, essentially. So you’re applying for credit and you’re just trying to find somebody to lend you money. So instead of — and that’s kind of like a shotgun blast. You take a sniper approach. So like if you’re going to buy a car, you’re going to narrow it down to the dealership or two that you’re looking at and apply for credit there instead of like just going everywhere. So these hard inquiries stay on your report for two years. I feel like I have a bunch of these from refinancing my house. I switched from Sprint or Verizon, they check your credit there. So ways to kind of get around this is you can take advantage of like preapproved credit cards where they’ve already kind of pulled your credit. If you use that car buying example, you know, if you say, hey, you apply for credit at Ford, Toyota, Chevy, etc., if they’re within a relatively short period of time, like I think it’s like a week or two, they group all of — it might be like three or four inquiries they’ll group together as one. But excellent is that 0-1. I think for right now on one of my credit reports, I have like three or four. And again, my credit is in the 800s, so it’s not a big, big thing. But it is something that they want to kind of keep tabs on because they don’t want people just fishing for credit. So those are really the different factors that kind of go into your credit score.

Tim Ulbrich: So before we talk about hard v. soft pull — because I think that’s an important distinction that many of our listeners would be interested in — I want to go back to that first one: credit card utilization because I think this is one where people might be surprised by that number of less than 10% or even try to get below 30%. So I imagine there is many people out there that might have, you know, one major credit card that they use, all their monthly expenses go on there, so they’re putting $4,000, $5,000, $6,000 and they’re obviously above that threshold. So what’s the play here? Is it trying to get that limit increased? Is it having multiple cards to diversify those expenses? What do you typically advise or work with clients here?

Tim Baker: Yeah. So you know, it’s something that I think you have to kind of tread carefully. And I kind of — depending on the client that I’m working with and the situation that we’re in, I’ll advise them accordingly. So you know, one of the ways to kind of game the system is if you say, hey, I have $2,000 worth of purchases of balances that I’m carrying, and I’m in a $10,000 limit. You’re in the 20%, which is not necessarily excellent. So one of the things that you could potentially do is ask for a credit increase, a credit line increase. So again, you’re increasing that denominator that kind of gets you — if you go from $10,000 to $20,000, that gets you kind of in that excellent band. I’ve done that in the past — or I’ve suggested that to clients in the past, and it’s worked, especially clients that are trying to get into like from like a 740, 745 credit score to a 750 and they’re like on the verge of buying a house. But if I also know that that client struggles with credit card debt, like I wouldn’t necessarily suggest that because now we’re just giving them a bigger chasm to kind of tumble into. So there are ways to kind of game the system. I think again, FICO and Vantage, they’re trying to kind of figure out ways to kind of, you know, get around that. But the utilization is still very, very important. If you’re maxing out your cards all the time, lenders want to know that. So yeah, I mean, I think it depends so much — like everything, it kind of depends on the situation and the person that we’re working with. But there are ways to kind of, I kind of say game the system because, again, you’re not really changing anything about your own behavior. You’re just kind of changing the numbers and the calculation and getting a little bit of a better score. So it’s going to depend on the situation. But I would imagine that they’re going to — you know, and I’ve also had clients that I’ve suggested that to that come back and they’re like, and actually the creditors push back on that. So it’s not — it used to be that — and in some cases, it still is — it’s like, yeah, no problem. If you want to spend more money, we’ll definitely collect the interest. But I think they’re trying to find ways to kind of make that a little bit harder so that they know that it’s not just for kind of gaming the system.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. So hard and soft pull on your credits. What’s the difference? And give us an example.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so typically I think for all three of the credit reports, at the end you’ll see kind of your soft pulls. So you’ll see like, hey, I’ve never done any type of business with like Discover card, but you’ll see them on your credit report.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: And what they’re doing — kind of think of it as like marketing. So they’re paying the reporting agencies to basically say, OK, show me the people that have a score from 700-750 or whatever. And they’re basically looking at your credit and devising a marketing strategy or deals for you to potentially — so that’s why you might get a mailer from Discover because they prequalified you for a deal. A hard inquiry is performed when you actually apply for a loan like a credit card, a mortgage, and the lender checks your credit history before granting or denying the loan. So these are the ones that basically stay on your report for two years whereas the soft ones, they don’t really have — they’re recorded, but they don’t really have any sway on your credit history at all. And it’s kind of something that’s good to review, but they’re not really, they’re not really going to move the needle in terms of — so like when you go to refinance your loans, to get a quote, they might do a soft pull on your credit. And it’s not going to affect anything, but then actually when you go to apply, they’ll do a hard pull. And that results in a hard inquiry, which will then be on your credit report for two years and it could potentially tick your credit down for, you know, a little bit. Like I said, it’s not going to move the needle much. But those are the big differences between the soft is kind of like where you’re just checking things out. The hard is where you’re basically signing papers for a particular loan.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and student loan refi is a good example. I think for our audience, that may hit home where they’re initially trying to gather rates across multiple companies in terms of soft pull, but then they ultimately move forward with one in terms of that full application, signing papers, and that’s where that hard inquiry would come from.

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s wrap up by talking about identity theft. What should somebody do if they find out that their information has been compromised or that someone has stolen their identity, is making charges out of their accounts or perhaps some listening want to be proactive and try to protect their identity and information? What advice would you have there?

Tim Baker: Yeah. So I don’t — I think this is kind of, I think in kind of the world that we live in, it’s not necessarily a question of if, you know, your identity is going to be stolen. It’s really a question of when, unfortunately. So I want to say, I don’t know, every other month, once a quarter, a client will say, my identity’s been stolen, what should I do? And you know, we typically kind of go through, like we obviously contact that creditor and we shut it down. You want to run a credit report, you want to dispute. And a lot of banks, like I’ll get alerts and things like that. They’re like, ‘Hey, is this yours?’ and I’m like no. So a lot of the banks have mechanisms in place to kind of protect you. But it also kind of gives you a little bit of a false sense of security too. So you want to make sure that you’re checking your reports regularly. And I tell clients, I try to do mine personally like when the clocks change. So when they fall back and they spring forward, like when you change the batteries in your smoke alarms. So I think it’s a good practice. And one of the times I checked mine — I want to say this was maybe five years ago — I checked my credit report, and it wasn’t necessarily identity theft, but there was a credit card that I shared with an ex long ago that just popped up on my report. And it affected my credit a lot, so I went in and I disputed it. You can go on to whatever, Experian, Equifax, Transunion and dispute those online. And then that basically puts the onus back on the creditor to basically say that this is a legit thing. And it was cleared from my credit report pretty quickly. So probably the biggest thing, though, outside of kind of being aware of your report and your score is looking at either like a credit freeze or credit lock. And they’re going to be very, very similar. But there’s slight differences. So both are ways to protect your credit reports from being used by scammers to open up new accounts or file your taxes with your social security number. They’re often — these are often used interchangeably. They are similar, but there’s slight differences. So the freeze, you can freeze your credit at each of the three credit reporting bureaus. It essentially restricts access to your credit report. And lenders can’t see your information until you unfreeze it. So it’s really a good protection against fraud. And unfreezing could require your name, social, a password, maybe even a pin. And this is going to be free by federal law. Federal law requires free credit freezes and unfreezes. The lock is where you restrict most lenders’ access, and you can lock your credit report immediately at any time. And sometimes there’s — I don’t think right now because of COVID, but some of these — this is like a charge, so there’s a monthly fee that you pay to a credit bureau. Again, it’s a preventative measure to prevent scammers. But this is not governed by federal law. So under the freeze, you’re kind of protected; under the lock, not necessarily. So I would always kind of revert to the freeze. You know, freezing your credit when I’ve done it — and if you’re not making any credit granting decisions, you’re not buying a house, a car, refinancing anything, it probably makes sense to go through and freeze your credit. It probably takes about 3-5 minutes each for each of the — and then to freeze it and then call it a day. So you’re going to need things like your identifying information, your name, address, birthdate, social. You might be able to — you might be required to basically set up a pin for that. So that’s going to be very, very important to protect. But this is going to prevent people from basically opening up fraudulent accounts in your name. And then when you go to make a credit granting decision, you just unfreeze it. So it’s kind of just a good defense rather than just keeping it unfrozen and open all the time. And believe it or not, this happens — I’m sure many people listening are like, yeah, that’s definitely happened to me. I’ve had this situation. And it’s typically not until you kind of talk to me about this or you have a big loss that you’re like, yeah, I’m keeping it frozen because it’s just not worth the time and the hassle to kind of go through mitigating losses or just the hassle of an identity theft event.

Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff, Tim Baker, as well. A topic that has been long overdue for us to talk about on the show. Three years in, we finally got to it. But I think this episode is a great reminder of the comprehensive nature of the financial plan. And we talk about this over and over again because it’s so, so important that when you’re working one-on-one with a financial planner, it’s not just about debt, it’s not just about investments, it’s not about any one given part of the financial plan. You have to look at really the whole spectrum. We say comprehensive means anything that has a dollar sign on it, we want to be involved with. And I think this is a great example where credit can transcend so many parts of the financial plan. It really speaks to the power of having a financial planner in your corner. So for those that are interested in working with YFP for comprehensive financial planning, make sure you head on over to YFPPlanning.com, where you can book a free discovery call. And as a reminder, show notes for this episode and every other show that we do, you can get access by going to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/podcast and finding the episode and getting the resources and information that we covered on that show. And please don’t forget to join our Facebook group. Over 6,000 members strong, pharmacy professionals committed to helping one another. And last but not least, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to your podcasts each and every week. Have a great rest of your day.

 

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 157: Budgeting Through a Pandemic


Budgeting Through a Pandemic

Tom Arasz, a YFP team member that leads the Script Your Budget service for YFP financial planning clients, joins Tim Ulbrich on this week’s episode. Tom talks about why the budget is so important, tips and tricks for effectively budgeting through a pandemic and the spending and saving trends he has observed during the past few months with the COVID-19 pandemic.

About Today’s Guest

Tom has been an Assistant Advisor for YFP for two years. He created and runs the Script Your Budget program for YFP clients. He lives in Baltimore, Maryland with his wife, Melissa, and their dog Archie. In his spare time he enjoys mountain biking, trying new bourbons, and thinking up corny dad jokes.

Summary

Tom Arasz talks all about budgeting during the COVID-19 pandemic on this week’s podcast episode. Tom runs the Script Your Budget (SYB) program for YFP financial planning clients. SYB is a 6-8 month program that’s focused on teaching and working with professionals not just about how to create a budget, but how to plan for the future by understanding your own tendencies and purchasing behaviors. Tom meets with clients almost every month to talk about their budget and future goals.

Tom explains that budgeting is more than just not spending money; instead, it’s about being intentional with your spending. He says that in order to learn where your money is going, you have to track your expenses, analyze them and then change your behavior.

Tom recently shared with Tim, Tim and Tim the trends he’s seen in his clients’ spending during the COVID-19 pandemic. Over the last couple of months, some clients cut their expenses by 20% or more. Tom explains that there are five categories that are big movers in having such a seismic impact on spending: forbearance of federal loans, reduction of daycare cost due to closures, no new travel being booked, reduction or elimination of self-care spending like haircuts and massages, and day-to-day changes such as gas, tolls, gym memberships or coffee purchases. The reduction in spending of these five categories in April carried into the month of May where clients saw similar spending trends. However, online shopping and home purchases have seen an uptick. Tom says that people are either putting the extra savings toward their credit card debt if they have it and, if not, are dumping it in their emergency fund.

Tom’s main takeaways from analyzing clients’ budgets over the last couple of months is that an emergency fund is important, dual income (if you have a spouse or partner) and/or diversity of your income can be helpful and that laying out an emergency plan to make sure you and your partner are on the same page regarding what to do if you are facing financial hardship can help prepare you for the times we have recently experienced.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tom, thank you for taking time to come on the show.

Tom Arasz: Thanks for having me, Tim.

Tim Ulbrich: So you recently shared with Tim, Tim, and I that budget trends that you’ve noticed while working with clients during COVID-19 and your predictions for the future. And I really thought that this information and your perspective was so important to share with the rest of the YFP community as everyone has experienced some type of budget shift in the last couple of months. But before we jump into that and discuss that further, talk to us a little bit more about the work that you do with YFP as it relates to the Script Your Budget program.

Tom Arasz: Sure. So the Script Your Budget program is a 6- to 8-month long engagement that I run with our YFP clients. It was initially created completely from scratch about two years ago by myself and Tim Baker. Since then, it has evolved and improved. But at its core, it remains — it’s maintained its focus to teach working professionals how to not just create a budget but how to effectively plan for their futures by understanding their tendencies and purchasing behaviors.

Tim Ulbrich: I love it. Intentional budgeting, coaching, accountability. We’ll talk more about the specifics of what you do in that service. And as a reminder to the community, if you are looking for a comprehensive financial planning services, which here of course includes our Script Your Budget program that we’re going to talk about, you can visit YFPPlanning.com. So Tom, tell me more. I mean, seriously, doesn’t budgeting just mean don’t spend the money, maybe set a goal or something. What’s the big deal?

Tom Arasz: Yeah, so budgeting is definitely more than just not spending money. It’s about being intentional with our spending by identifying what’s more important to you and then focusing on those areas. So a budget is a plan — and really, anyone can set up a budget. But it takes more than that. You need to track your expenses so you can learn where your money has been going. And then from there, you need to analyze how you wish to change your behavior. Finally, you need to set some goals to accomplish. And I do that with our clients by meeting with them every 5-6 weeks or so to go over those expenses and see how they’re doing to change any unwanted behaviors.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I love that. I mean, as you mentioned, you’ve got to track your expenses. You have to know what it has been before you talk about where things can go in the future. And I know in my own personal experience or situation, which I’m guessing is true for many, we tend to underestimate our true spending in any given category. And a look back at expenses can really help expose that and even if you’re going to reduce some of those numbers, you at least have a good baseline understanding of where they’ve been. Now Tom, you know that at YFP, we talk so much on the show as well as with our clients about the importance of finding your financial why, really understanding why do we care about this topic of money to begin with and ultimately, what is the vision and purpose that we have when it comes to managing our money and the tool that we will be able to use to accomplish the other goals and dreams that we have. So here we’re talking very granular, the budget. Why is the budget so critical to helping one be able to achieve that personal vision, that why that they have for their own financial plan?

Tom Arasz: Yeah, so I think what makes budgeting a little challenging is that each person is budgeting differently and they’re budgeting for different reasons. So each one of our clients is their own individual, they could be single, they could be married, they could have kids, they could not have kids. So ultimately, it’s my job to help them understand why they’re budgeting and how budgeting can help them with those goals.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, it’s a road map, right? I mean, it’s the execution plan. You’ve got the vision and you set the vision, and the budget is really the month-by-month execution of that plan so you can achieve those goals. So I know this about you, that you refer to yourself as a personal trainer but for people’s finances. Is that an accurate description?

Tom Arasz: Yeah, exactly. So personal trainer for your finances. I also like to think of myself as an accountability buddy. So I hold people’s feet to the flames. I meet with them monthly to “force” you to keep track of your expenses and then ultimately, I help you the client out by adding insight where it’s needed, praising the hard work and progress that these people make. And last but definitely not least, I like to think that I bring a ton of experience to budgeting. So I’ve seen 50-100 different budgets from the 27-year-old recently graduated or resident to the married couple with 2.5 kids focusing on trying to purchase a minivan and then ultimately retire.

Tim Ulbrich: So besides working with 50-100 different budgets, which is, as you mentioned, brings that experience, what is it about your personal situation and story that gets you so excited and passionate about budgeting and helping others in this area?

Tom Arasz: Yeah, so I acknowledge that I get really jacked up about budgeting, and that’s not necessarily for most people. But I grew up in a really stereotypical suburban family: two loving parents, two older sisters, a dog, a backyard, a fence. My dad was a banker for 35 years and instilled in us to be very fiscally responsible. My mom took turns, she worked a number of different jobs while also raising the three kids, babysitting half the kids on the block kind of a thing. So we — my parents drove very modest cars. My sisters and I wore lots of hand-me-down clothing. And my mom cooked us meals five or six nights a week. I like to joke that a fancy dinner for us was that we would go to Chili’s like once a month because they had a kids’ menu, which back then not every place had kids’ menus.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tom Arasz: And they offered free refills on soda, and my sisters and I would guzzle soda down. So my entire childhood, I thought I was kind of poor. And today, you know, as a 30-some-year-old, I realize that I was blessed with that experience. I’ve never charged a purchase that I couldn’t have outright paid for. My dream working with these clients and in this budget setting is to get everyone out of credit card debt and to live a little bit more modest. One of my favorite moments so far in the program was more than a year ago, I saw that one of our clients was paying over $400 a month for DirectTV. Yeah, which is insane. So I helped her to negotiate down. And she now pays a much more reasonable amount. And that basically saved $300+ a month, which I like to tell all my clients, when you take it from a monthly amount to a yearly amount, that’s $4,000 a year. And that’s after tax money, so really, that’s like having a $5,000 or $6,000 raise.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and you can extrapolate that out further. What if you were to invest that money and do other things? And I love that example too because you and I both know when it comes to those wins, it’s not just that win, which is a win in and of itself. But it’s about the longer term win of feeling empower and hopefully getting momentum towards other goals. So I heard you right that with the Script Your Budget program, you’re meeting with clients on a monthly basis, give or take. Is that correct?
Tom Arasz: Yeah. So my focus for each client is to get them, whether it’s a person or a couple, to treat their finances as if they’re their own company like Under Armour or Google. We look at your expenses in “monthly financials.” And we discuss what areas have increased or decreased. And we talk, more importantly, why they increased or decreased. And ultimately, what do they want to do in the following months to change or to improve?

Tim Ulbrich: Love the value and power of accountability in doing that. So let’s shift gears and talk through what you saw over the last couple months during the pandemic. And you know, everyone of course is familiar with the time sequence. But we’ll go back. Mid-March is when COVID-19 really started impacting daily life in most parts of the U.S. as many states went into lockdown, people started working from home if they were able to do so, businesses and restaurants began temporarily closing their doors. So mid-March, what impact did you think this was going to have on your clients’ budget and expenses? And ultimately, did that happen? What did you end up seeing in terms of spending in the month of March and why was that the case?

Tom Arasz: So I’m in Maryland, and again, mid-March everybody was sent to work from home if you could do that. I had been working from home for about two weeks by the end of March, and at that point, I really started to think that there would be a major shift in our clients’ budgets. Obviously, the country is now in this state of pandemic. But at that time, I got 40 different budgeters on my mind, 40 different households in different cities, states, incomes and ultimately, 40 different spending habits.

Tim Ulbrich: Kind of like you have 40 different kids, huh?

Tom Arasz: I’d say 40 different close friends and 40 different friends that I care about. So by the end of March, I’m going stir-crazy. My wife and I haven’t gone anywhere for the last two or three weeks, and I’m thinking, you know, my budgeters’ financials are going to be looking great. And in reality, that just didn’t happen in March. Businesses slowed down, people started working from home, but people immediately, just like me, rushed out to the grocery stores, bought up as much frozen pizza, milk, eggs, cheese, flour, sugar, toilet paper, and even wine. And really, the month of March ended with very little impact to the savings.

Tim Ulbrich: I think that’s a great observation. I mean, that reminds me as I’m reflecting back to our household in March, yeah, I wasn’t driving to work every day and minimized some expense there but our grocery bill went up, other things went up as we were trying to make sure we had the right supplies or even if we weren’t trying to necessarily overstock in anythings, some things were just going up in price. And obviously that budget line was going up. So you mentioned to me that there were a number of changes to budgets in April that had a “seismic” impact on spending and that some clients’ expenses went down by 20% or more. What were those changes?

Tom Arasz: Yeah. So there were five big categories or big movers in the budgets that I saw. Now, obviously I’m going to go through these five. Not all of them affected each and every one of us because everyone’s different. But No. 1, we had forbearance on public loans for the next few months. And No. 2 would be daycares in certain states were closed. So obviously those first two ones don’t apply to everyone.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tom Arasz: But if they do apply to you, they could be really big. The third area would be that zero new vacation or travel was really booked by my clients. And that includes in-person entertainment as well, so that would be sporting events, baseball games, concerts, things like that. The fourth area would be self-care as well as what I like to call image shopping. Those two were practically $0 as well. So self-care would be haircuts, nails, makeup, massages. Image shopping, that to me is like higher end things like clothing, purses, shoes, things that we want to be seen in. I even include cars in this category. But these are wants not needs. And then finally, the fifth one would be our day-to-day changes. So this probably affected everyone out there. This would be transportation, so gas, tolls, Uber, car insurance. This would be also be gym memberships as most states closed gyms. This would also be our day-to-day coffee stops. Many people on their way to work or at lunchtime, they go with their coworkers, they pick up a shake or coffee or tea. This would also impact bar and restaurants. And I know that after a week or two of shutdowns, we started getting inundated with those go order takeout from your local places, keep them in business, help out servers, help out bartenders. And my wife and I definitely partake in that, but those purchases in general, especially bar tabs, went to zero. So the overall impact of these five categories, I really do like to use the word seismic because it was massive. My average client’s expenses went down by 20% but in some cases a lot more. Really, the only thing that didn’t go down or that disappointed me a little bit was people who had booked flights in prior months. You know, if you bought a flight in February or early March, you did not, for the most part, get that money back. You instead got airline credits or points, unfortunately.

Tim Ulbrich: So there’s the month of April, you start to see this “seismic shift,” so talk to us about what you begin to see in May then. Were those trends similar to what you saw happen in April?

Tom Arasz: Yeah. So May, the vast majority of my clients had very similar expenses to what they had already done in April. And the clients that I met with at the end of April, I basically told them whatever you spend in April, you’re probably going to end up doing the exact same thing in May because we unfortunately lived almost the exact same life that we had from April to May. Now this is a case-by-case basis, depending on where people live. So my New York City or my California residents’ situations are much different than say someone living in rural Arkansas. I did see a small uptick in online purchases for clothing and Amazon and stuff in May. But it’s worth mentioning really one of the few categories that I saw go up both months would be home purchases and home improvement projects.

Tim Ulbrich: OK, so that’s not just us. You know, Jess and I have talked about that. We’ve done some of that, which has been nice to catch up. But is that a trend you’re seeing as well, everyone working on their houses?

Tom Arasz: I mean, almost everyone. You know, the lawns in my neighborhood have never looked better.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tom Arasz: And I wish, you know, we track expenses in this program. I wish we tracked numbers of rooms painted since March because that’s definitely been a popular trend. But yeah, again, a little bit different if you’re living in an apartment that you rent versus living out in the countryside in an owned house with a backyard. Some people just have more ability to do more projects than others.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I can see that going either way. Obviously if there’s a financial hardship or a time period such as the pandemic, you want to be cautious. But also, I think people had time to catch up and do things or multiple Amazon packages that are showing, right, per week or per day. Or trying to do things at home that you might otherwise go out and do, you know, whether that’s cutting hair, nails, etc. and so forth. So you know, I’m going to put you maybe in an uncomfortable position, but I like to think that through your assistance, navigating a difficult period such as this, that our clients working with you on Script Your Budget perform better than say, you know, those that aren’t doing that. Can you speak to any anecdotal evidence or successes that you’ve had along the way?

Tom Arasz: Well, I mean, yes. I don’t obviously track the expenses of people who don’t work with me. But I would like to think that I’ve helped our clients save money. And especially in this pandemic, I’d like to think that I’m helping people navigate holding onto their savings more so than without us. So I’ve been spending countless hours reading articles and blog posts about COVID-19. Not so much about like, you know, number of hospitalizations and cases, but how does this affect the day-to-day things? I realized that people were buying more toys for their kids and activities for their kids because you can’t take your kid to daycare. All of a sudden, you’re also the daycare. So we definitely saw prices go up there. We also saw price go up — you said it earlier — but with food. So even if you were buying the same amount of food as you were before COVID hit, prices in the grocery store have gone up.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tom, here we are now, most state lockdowns are starting to dissipate and businesses, restaurants, bars — of course depending on the state — are opening back up with some restrictions. So with that in mind, what do you expect to see happen to people’s budgets in the months to come?

Tom Arasz: Yeah, so we’re — first off, we’re entering summer months. And in the last two years that I’ve ran the Script Your Budget program, one of our most significant trends has been that expenses go up in late spring/early summer. You know, the weather’s nice, the days are longer, people want to be outside. Plus, people go on vacations. So I would expect my clients’ numbers to go up in the coming months no matter what. The only months where expenses are higher than in the summer in the past two years has been November and December.

Tim Ulbrich: Ah, holidays, right?

Tom Arasz: Yeah. So holidays, gift-giving, going to see family and friends, attending parties and of course, for people who don’t live at home, traveling to and from.

Tim Ulbrich: Got it. Got it. So states open back up, what happens? I mean, I assume every person will of course react differently. But generally speaking, what do you think will happen?

Tom Arasz: Yeah, so I suspect people will generally seek outdoor and less crowded areas. And I know that’s like a big “Duh, no kidding, Tom,” but you know, hiking, biking, being outside boating, fishing, those will continue to see popularity. Cookouts in backyards with friends versus going to a dining area or restaurant that’s crowded. Sporting events, when they do open back up, if they even allow people, they’ll be less crowded than if COVID hadn’t ever happened. People will even rethink going to big events such as graduations, weddings, to a certain degree. Outdoor dining in general will change. So crowded bars and restaurants will recover a bit slower. Places with outdoor seating will do a little bit better. I’m risk-averse, so I think people like me will start going to dinner on like weekdays instead of weekends. I don’t live downtown anymore, I have a backyard and a grill. But I’d rather go out on a Wednesday night with less people around and then make a fancy grilled dinner at home on the weekends. I’d rather take my wife out midday on Saturday for a drink to a cool new place when it’s less crowded than on a Saturday night. You know, so literally when places and times become crowded or popular, that’s what I’m going to avoid. And I think people will still go out, it will just be more intentional.

Tim Ulbrich: What about other areas of a person’s budget?

Tom Arasz: So I cut my hair last month, and that’s the first time I’ve cut my hair in a couple years, since meeting my wife.

Tim Ulbrich: How’d it turn out? How’d it go?

Tom Arasz: Better than you would expect. But I used to cut my hair back in the day, which if Tim Baker’s listening, he’ll start laughing.

Tim Ulbrich: Experience, yes.

Tom Arasz: Yeah, because I used to do that. So I’m a little bit different than, say, my wife, who’s like counting down the seconds to getting her hair done for the first time in awhile. So everyone’s different. For vacations, personally, I’ve been saying this for months that I’m not ready to go on airplanes or in crowded airports and that I — when this first hit, I thought to myself, everyone’s going to vacation through car. So you know, pack the family up and drive somewhere versus if you have like a 4-year-old and a 6-year-old and they put their hands on everything in an airport, you know, put them in your car instead. And then where you’re going. So going to more remote places. So backpacking, camping, things like that. Going to a more secluded beach versus going to a boardwalk or a big park.

Tim Ulbrich: That makes a lot of sense. And you know, I’m reflecting on your haircutting comment. And I decided to invest with four boys — now, one is just a year old so my wife won’t let me cut his hair yet, it’s still the baby hair — but my three others, I normally take them to a barber, it’s fairly expensive. And I was like, this is a great opportunity to invest in some equipment, watch some YouTube videos. And the lesson I learned — even though it’s gone fairly well and each cut gets better — I learned that watching somebody on YouTube can quickly instill overconfidence in the process. So you’ve got to practice. You’ve just got to get in there and do it. And it’s been a fun family experience. So are there budget categories, any other categories that you think will remain the same as they were in the middle of the COVID-19?

Tom Arasz: Probably not. You know, I think this is kind of like a hopefully a once-in-a-lifetime experience. You know, loan forbearance for those people will stick around for a few more months to September, which is nice. But daycares will open back up, self-care will open back up. I know my wife has a hair appointment coming up in a few weeks. And travel will tick back up no matter what. I do expect home expenses to go back down because we just did a whole bunch of projects. And hopefully there’s nothing else to do in the foreseeable future. But ultimately, even if numbers don’t stay the same, I really do hope that people have taken some positives away from obviously, you know, not to say the COVID-19 was positive — it was a negative thing. But some people can take some positives away from this. It’s really shown how much material possessions add up in your budget. You can save significant money by changing just some of your behaviors. And another lesson is that cooking food and eating in is way less expensive than dining out. I think a number of my clients have learned that the past few months. Even when you’re going out, you’re buying the alcoholic drinks or if you’re getting delivery, you’re tipping the drivers whereas it’s much more economical to just pick the food up yourself.

Tim Ulbrich: So I’m curious, as we talk about savings and as you call them, seismic, significant savings, where did people put the savings that they have had with such a significant drop to expenses due to student loan forbearance, you mentioned reduction of travel, perhaps dining out less, daycare? Have you heard of — I’m sure — clients accelerating other areas of their financial plan over the last couple months because of these savings?

Tom Arasz: Yeah. So I definitely can group these people, our clients, into two categories: people who are in credit card debt and people who are not in credit card debt. Anyone that has any sort of credit card debt has just been aggressively paying it off.

Tim Ulbrich: Love it.

Tom Arasz: Yeah, which is great. It really makes me happy to see. The other group, people who might not have credit card debt, the biggest thing I’ve seen is emergency fund, socking money away, keeping cash at hand. If they don’t have an emergency — if they don’t have enough of an emergency fund, they’re adding to it. And even the people who have an adequate emergency fund have been adding even more on top of it.

Tim Ulbrich: Got it.

Tom Arasz: The last couple months have been kind of stressful, to say the least. The last thing you want to worry about is money.

Tim Ulbrich: So main takeaways, Tom, that you’ve had while working with clients during this time. How adaptable were people to changes in income that they may have experienced? And ultimately, you know, what have been those big takeaways as you’ve worked with clients?

Tom Arasz: Yeah. So I mean, first off, I think that our clients have handled this tremendously. It’s not easy to deal with something you’ve never dealt with in your life before. And so even just on our monthly calls with people, they’re just happy to talk to somebody new, to have some assurance that what they’re doing is correct and is working for them. And so the main takeaways for those people, No. 1, the importance of the emergency fund. I can’t state it enough. I probably sound like a broken record to my clients. But it’s just — it’s so important. So No. 2 would be the importance of either dual incomes for couples or diversity of incomes for individual. So not putting all your eggs in one bucket. You could even think about some of my clients who own investment properties, people who have invested in dividends, stocks, things like that. The ability to crosstrain yourself or your spouse in your career, whether picking up a certification, really just making yourself more attractive to more companies and more industries. My wife and I have been very fortunate that we’re in opposite industries. So two complete industries, she’s in healthcare, I’m in business. We work for two different companies. If my company or her company were to be hit the hardest by the pandemic, we have the other one to fall back on. Now, that would put us still in a tough spot like anyone, but that’s where my third takeaway comes into play and that would be having an emergency plan. Different than an emergency fund. This is where, especially for couples, having both partners on the same page, having a shared vision, a shared understanding that if something out of our control happens, what do we do? What do we prioritize? And ultimately, how long can we weather a storm?

Tim Ulbrich: I love that concept of an emergency plan and the difference from an emergency fund. Great thing for our listeners to be thinking through as they reflect on everything that we’ve just gone through. So Tom, looking even further into the future, do you think that clients or people in general will be able to remember how to trim their budget and live off of less if they are really needing to? Or do you think that people will go back to their old ways of living and spending and not really remember what it was like to have a 10-30% reduction in their expenses?

Tom Arasz: So I don’t think that our numbers will stay the same. I think it’s pretty — it would be an impossible task to ask people to duplicate April and May’s numbers. But that’s just human nature. I mean, we’re going to go back out. We’re going to go do things. But I do truly think that people will take away some valuable lessons here. You know, is that $100 massage or that $100 bar tab with your buddies, is that really what means the most to you? Or would you rather invite some friends over in the backyard for a cookout or do something different with that money? Ultimately, I think for me, you know, what I want out of the next few months is I want to be able to see my family, and I want to be able to see my friends. And it doesn’t really cost a whole lot of money to do those things. And that’s what I’ve taken out of it. And you know, I think in the last two months, especially some of my spender clients, I think that they’ve really seen what the best month possible could be. And I think that excites a lot of people. I think that kind of instills some pride that — and some confidence in like hey, this is what we really could do.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Tom Arasz: You know, if we locked it down.

Tim Ulbrich: I appreciate you, Tom, not only the work that you’ve done with so many of our clients and the Script Your Budget program, which I truly believe is transformative. We always talk about when it comes to achieving your long-term financial goals and ultimately achieving that why, you know, your budget is really the plan that’s going to help you get there and so the work that you’re doing I truly believe is having a significant impact on many, many lives and families. So thank you for that work, but also thank you for taking the time to join me on the show this week.

Tom Arasz: Thank you, Tim. Thanks for having me. And a quick shoutout, thanks to my parents for really instilling all of this in me. And I think we can laugh about this — thanks to my wife Melissa. She really puts up with me putting in the countless hours in the evenings to hang out with strangers on the internet.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. And I’m sure we’ll have many listening that are folks from the community that have worked with you one-on-one and so I’m sure they’ll enjoy hearing from you as well. So for those that are listening that want to learn more about our comprehensive financial planning services, which includes our Script Your Budget program led by Tom, head on over to YFPPlanning.com where you can book a free discovery call today to learn more. And as always, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please leave us a rating or review in Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to the show each and every week. Have a great rest of your week.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 156: Should You Refinance Your Student Loans Right Now?


Should You Refinance Your Student Loans Right Now?

Tim Church, YFP student loan guru, joins Tim Ulbrich to talk about all things student loan refinancing. Tim discusses what refinancing is, how it differs from consolidation, the benefits, the potential drawbacks, what to look for when choosing a company, and whether or not borrowers should refinance while the CARES Act is in place.

Summary

Tim Church and Tim Ulbrich dive deep into all things student loan refinancing in this episode. Tim Church explains that refinancing student loans is similar to refinancing a home mortgage and that the general goal of refinancing is to lower the interest rate so that you’re paying less on the loan over time. Refinancing can also change the type of interest you have on a loan and the terms of the loan.

Tim explains that there are several benefits of refinancing student loans including reducing the interest rate, removing a cosigner, getting out of a variable interest rate on a loan, accelerating or catalyzing your payoff, and also the potential to get paid by a company to refinance. Since refinancing federal loans pulls them out of the federal loan system and into the private sector, there are several drawbacks to refinancing including that your student loans may not be discharged upon death or disability and that you may not be able to receive help through forbearance if you are experiencing a financial hardship.

However, with COVID-19 and the CARES Act in place, Tim says that federal loan borrowers in general should not refinance their student loans. This is because the CARES Act has allowed for a pause on making federal student loan payments without interest accruing, late fees or a reporting of a delinquent status until September 30, 2020. During this time, pharmacists with qualifying federal student loans can take the money they would normally use on their student loans and apply it to other financial priorities, like paying down credit card debt or bulking up an emergency fund. If someone is facing financial hardship, then The CARES Act is beneficial for them as they don’t need to worry about making any payments at this time. Additionally, if a pharmacist is pursuing a forgiveness program, these $0 payments are counted as a qualifying payment.

Tim also discusses the protections the federal loan system offers its borrowers, when refinancing might make sense, and why and how he refinanced his loans multiple times.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Church, welcome back to the show.

Tim Church: Thanks, Tim. Always a pleasure to be on here, whether I’m doing the interview or the interviewee.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. Well, I appreciate you coming on. And so here we are, and Episode 149, we heard all about the journey you and Andria took to pay off $400,000 of debt in five years. So what’s new? The debt-free life is what? Give us the update.

Tim Church: Well, in general, it’s feeling pretty darn good. I mean, just having that massive amount of disposable income now, it just feels like that weight is off our shoulders. So anything that comes up that we need to purchase, like it’s never like, oh, do we have enough to cover that? Do we have enough to hit our other goals? But I’ll tell you, what’s interesting is it feels like there’s so many things right now competing for that disposable income. So even though the student loans are gone, it’s like, OK, let’s go onto the next thing. So we’re really looking at replacing our vehicles, we want to save for a down payment on a home, we built up our emergency fund pretty well, but all of these things are kind of going right in a row.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And we were talking a little bit before the show, I was reflecting back on the journey that Jess and I took and now looking with our four boys at home and the expense that they are, especially as we get into our grocery budget lately, my gosh, with the four of them. It’s real, though. I mean, there’s just competing priorities. And I think it’s a good reminder the value of being debt-free if that’s a possibility as it relates to your student loans, you go into that next phase of life, which is exciting. So Episode 149, we talked about the journey that you and Andria took to pay of $400,000 of debt in five years. And then we followed that up in Episode 150 and we gave our listeners a sneak peek of our newest book, authored by you, “The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans.” And here we are, still in the midst of the COVID-19 pandemic and considering the impact of that pandemic and the passage of the CARES Act, which we talked about a little bit in Episode 146, questions have been popping up about refinancing student loans, when it does or does not make sense given the current situation. So we wanted to bring back onto the show our student loan guru, our very own Tim Church, to dig deeper into this topic. So Tim, back on Episode 149, you mentioned that although not the most important thing that you did to knock out your debt, one that did help in a significant way was refinancing your loans. So remind us, what is refinancing? And how does it differ from consolidation?

Tim Church: When you refinance student loans, you’re really changing or restructuring those terms. And it could be one thing or it could be a combination of things. But in general, when you refinance, you’re changing the interest rate, but you could also be changing the type of interest, either going from a fixed rate to a variable rate or variable to a fixed or some kind of a hybrid rate. Or you could also be changing the terms. So maybe your loans are 20 years or could be 30 years, and maybe you’re changing it to a 5-year, a 7-year, a 10-year. So really, what you’re doing is just, like I said, you’re just changing or restructuring what those terms are. Now, one of the things is that you can’t refinance within the federal system. And I know that there’s big talks about being able to do that one day in the future. But for a long time, especially those with graduate loans or professional loans, they’ve had very high interest rates, including myself. Most of mine were in the realm of 6.8%, so really encroaching that 7% mark. And refinance really differs from consolidation because you’re actually — your goal is to try to get a better interest rate than what you currently have or what exists whereas consolidation in general is just taking multiple loans, which could have different interest rates, combining them into one loan, and then really you get the end result of one weighted interest rate. And then usually when people are referencing consolidation, they’re talking about a direct consolidation loan, which is through the federal loan system. And sometimes that’s done to make it easier if you’re going through one of the forgiveness programs or maybe you’re trying to convert loans that didn’t qualify that you want to qualify or just overall make it a little bit easier having one servicer, one payment per month. But in essence, you’re not really changing the structure of the loan because you’re still paying the weighted interest rate of multiple loans.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, good distinction, Tim. One of the most common questions that we get — and I think a lot of confusion — is this difference between refinancing and consolidation. And so just to reiterate, when you’re refinancing, the goal is to actually reduce your interest rate. When you’re consolidating your loans, bringing them together, combining them into one loan, it’s a weighted average interest rate across those loans. So you’re not effectively lowering the overall interest rate but rather getting a weighted average of the interest rate of those loans. So talk to us then about the benefits of refinancing student loans. Why would one consider this path?

Tim Church: Well, it’s just kind of like refinancing a home. Your overall goal for the most part is you’re trying to get a lower interest rate than what currently exists and what you’re paying because over the course of the loan, depending on how fast you pay it off and depending on your term, you’re generally going to save more money over time because each and every month, more of your payment is going towards the principal instead of interest. So if you are making a certain payment on a loan at say 7% interest and you refinance and continue to make that same payment at a lower interest such as 5%, you’re going to pay the loan off faster because, again, more of that payment is going toward the interest. Now, there are a couple other reasons why you might consider it, so if you have a cosigner on a loan and you’re trying to remove that and take full responsibility, that might be one reason to do that. Maybe you have a variable loan. So obviously not currently — we’re not in the realm where variable interest rates on student loans are going to be tremendously high. But in some situations, that’s one of the reasons why people would get out of a variable loan because they don’t want to pay such high interest and get more toward the monthly payments. One of the interesting things that I did that I think really made a big impact when I was paying off my loans is I thought it helped accelerate or catalyze my payoff. So we already talked about in past episodes that I made some mistakes along the way, should have went for forgiveness, but sort of once I was on that path of OK, let’s get the student loans out of my life, let’s go for it, when I refinanced to a 5-year term — at one point I think I was paying like $3,200 or $3,300 was my automatic payment drafted every month, I had to make that payment. And so what it did was I knew that I had to basically shift my budget around that payment because it was such a large payment. But it forced me to make it. And so I think everybody has experience at least some point in their life, maybe not every day, but present bias where we really care more about spending our money today versus saving it or putting it towards debt or something else. And so I knew that when that payment came up, I had to have money in my bank account in order for it to process through and not default on it. So for me, it was kind of a way that I was going to get after it, I was going to accelerate and make it happen. And then one of the other benefits that is out there certainly is actually getting paid by one of these companies to refinance. So it’s a very competitive market out there, there’s a lot of players. And they’re trying to get your business. And so the nice thing is unlike a home mortgage refi where you might have to pay closing costs or some kind of fee, there really is no cost to you other than the time it takes to fill out the paperwork in order to do it. But you might actually get paid some kind of welcome bonus or new customer bonus as a result of refinancing with a particular company.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great summary, Tim. And your example of your own story and having larger forced payments I think is a great one for especially — I mean, in general — but especially our new grads that are hearing this where I see that as one of the areas where income-driven repayment plans can get people in trouble where they may start off as a smaller payment and naturally expenses and lifestyle creep and other things may rise your expenses around that versus one of the benefits of a fixed, larger payment such as in your situation is it forces you to really prioritize that debt repayment and then budget around that.

Tim Church: Yeah, and I think, Tim, that there’s a couple ways to look at that. I think one side of the camp is kind of what I talked about as like we are our own worst enemy. So we need some things in place in order to protect ourselves from ourselves. But then obviously you have the other side where people say, “Well, I don’t want to have to force myself to make that payment. I’ll just choose a plan where I have to make a lower payment, and then I’ll pay extra every month.” And sometimes that works, but not always.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think too is you do a nice job talking about on this topic in general, you’ve also got to consider the opportunity cost as you’re thinking about other priorities with your financial plan. And I think you do a great job of this in the book, “The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans,” where you talk about all of the different options that are out there and really take the reader through from beginning to end, understanding those options and then determining for their own personal situation what is perhaps the best option for them to move forward based on all of these different variables that we’ve been talking about thus far and have talked about previously on the show. So certainly as you outlined, there are some perks or some benefits with refinancing student loans. But with everything going on with COVID, potential income hits in the CARES Act, is this still something, is refinancing pharmacists should even be considering right now?

Tim Church: In general, I would say no.

Tim Ulbrich: Alright. So thanks for joining us on this week’s episode. We’ve got nothing else to talk about, Tim! I mean, what do you mean, “in general, no?”

Tim Church: We answer the question.

Tim Ulbrich: So why should most pharmacists not refinance their loans right now?

Tim Church: Well, let’s look at this through the lens of what kind of loans one has. And I understand you may have federal and private, but let’s consider the majority of your loans is in one of those buckets. So if you have federal loans, one of the reasons why I would say no at this point is really because of the CARES Act. And that really was something that was just huge benefit that the federal government rolled out as a way to help students deal with their loans during this time, knowing that a lot of people have been hit with either a reduced income or completely loss of income. But essentially what this did was it allowed those who have federal loans to pause all of their payments until Sept. 30 of this year, something that is really done automatically by the servicer. But any qualifying loan such as direct federal loans, direct subsidized, direct unsubsidized, direct consolidation loans and FFEL loans and Perkins loans owned by the Department of Education, all of those qualify under that. And not only did they allow you to stop making payments, but they’re really — there’s no interest that accrues during that time. I mean, which is a huge benefit for a lot of people that are struggling financially.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think it’s really important, we talked about this a little bit before on the Financial Considerations for COVID-19 when we talked about the CARES Act, but through Sept. 30, 2020 — and the Department of Education, for clarification, does have the option to extend this for three months if they choose to do so. That has not been done yet. But they do have the option to extend this through the end of 2020. But on qualifying loans, so as you mentioned, Tim, direct federal loans as well as those FFEL loans and Perkins loans that are owned by the Department of Education, those essentially you have a $0 payment that’s due as well as 0% interest. So the only thing excluded from this would be FFEL and Perkins loans not owned by the Department of Education, health professions loans, and private loans. So no interest, $0 payments on qualifying loans, so also talk to us about the PSLF provisions or those that are pursuing even non-PSLF, whether or not those payments count towards forgiveness.

Tim Church: Right, so those who are on the track for PSLF or non-PSLF forgiveness after 20-25 years, as you probably know, you have to be in an income-driven repayment plan and make qualifying payments during that time. Now, normally, if you’re in forbearance, those loan payments do not count towards either the 120 or depending if you’re going for 20-25 years. But because this is an administrative forbearance, any of these $0 payments, they essentially count towards the number that you’re trying to qualify for. So even during this time, it’s kind of like you’re getting a free pass without having to make that income-driven repayment but still getting the credit. So it’s actually a great time where you can shift whatever you were paying towards forgiveness in one of the income-driven plans to some other financial goal or having fun if you still have the income.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, you mentioned and clearly articulated that for those that have qualifying federal loans, obviously in this time period, $0 payments, 0% interest, doesn’t make sense. I think it’s also worth noting here that, you know, when you look at the major benefits of refinances, as you mentioned earlier, you’re often going and shooting for a significant reduction in interest rate that hopefully is going to save thousands and thousands of dollars over the repayment. And sometimes in doing that, you’re willing to take on some things that private lenders, even though these have largely been very, very competitive with the federal offering, in doing that, trying to accomplish that goal of reducing your interest rate and saving that money, you’re willing to take on some things with a private lenders that are different than what the federal program offers. So remind us of what those protections are that not all private lenders offer that somebody will get in the federal system.

Tim Church: Sure. So I think one of the biggest ones is the option to immediately opt in for a income-driven repayment plan. So essentially, if you have federal loans at any time, you can say, “I want to go into an income-driven repayment plan,” and they’re going to base that off of your last year’s tax return or if your income has significantly decreased since that time that you filed, that they’re going to base your payments upon that, which is really I think is a huge deal because if you are somebody who has significant income change, that is a great benefit. It’s essentially a safety net in order — if anything happens to your income. And then I think some of the other big ones are forbearance, so even if you couldn’t make the income-driven repayment payments on a particular plan, you could basically push pause. But you would be responsible for income as it would — or I’m sorry — the interest would accrue during this time on anything that was unsubsidized. And then you may not get the benefit of having your loans discharged if you happen to pass or you became permanently disabled, which is another benefit. Now, some private lenders will have those options in place, which is good. So I think that’s something to really know when you are signing that over, especially if you’re going from federal to a private lender when you refinance is know about those because if it’s something that they don’t offer, if anyone is essentially on the hook for any of those loans or if they try to cede your estate, you definitely want to have those insurance policies to really protect you in case that would happen.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great stuff, Tim, too. And I think it’s also worth mentioning here, as we talked about on Episode 153 with student loan attorney Adam Minsky that there are some forgiveness provisions that are on the horizon that are being proposed in the legislature. To be clear here, nothing has been passed. This is all hearsay at this point in time. And we talked about several of those that might come to be or may not come to be, everything ranging from potentially an extension of the $0 payment, 0% interest or perhaps some forgiveness that could be happened in there for federal loans, some of those proposed legislations do and do not include private loans. So I think there’s a whole host of things that may or may not be coming. Again, at this point, nothing has been passed. But as we’ve talked about on Episode 153, one of the benefits I think for staying put if you have qualifying federal loans in addition to everything we’ve talked about, is to see how this plays out for the foreseeable future as they look at perhaps the next coronavirus relief bill that may or may not come to be.

Tim Church: Yeah, and I saw on I think it was the Facebook group and on our page, there was some people that were pretty upset about these forgiveness programs and whether or not they would go through after they’ve either paid off most of their loans or paid it off completely. So I think the bottom line is that you can’t always time when these things are going to happen, but if you have an opportunity, it might be worth waiting a little bit to see if it does come through. But I think one of the biggest things when you look at whether when you’re making that decision to refinance, there’s one huge assumption that you’re making. And I think it’s so critical. It’s that you’re assuming that when you refinance, that your income isn’t going to change or it’s going to go up, that you’re not going to have any change in your income. And I think that is such a key thing because again, those protections to either push pause or go to an income-driven repayment, that’s not necessarily going to be there depending on the lender that you’re working with. So you may have a pretty secure job or you may be in a situation where you’re not quite sure or maybe you’ve had reduced hours. And so especially in those situations, I think you’ve got to be really careful because if all of a sudden your income takes a big hit, well then you could be in a very unfortunate situation.

Tim Ulbrich: So to that point, Tim, for those that are listening that have private loans and are thinking, what the heck? I’ve been left out of all this. I was trying to do my due diligence and make payments and perhaps they’re in a financial hardship, maybe not, what options do they have? I remember seeing some states that were moving things forward, trying to work with private lenders. But as I understand it, that’s not really the same as the provisions of the CARES Act in terms of what that offers borrowers. Talk to us a little bit more about that.

Tim Church: Yeah, so there’s a number of states that believe — at the time of this recording, there’s about nine or 10 states that have stepped in to work with private lenders, including some of the big players like SoFi, Lendkey, Earnest, Navient. But basically, these provisions kind of mimic the CARES Act in that they’re also allowing borrowers to temporarily suspend payments for 90 days. They’re also waiving late fees. But I think one of the biggest things is that the interest does not stop accruing if you’re not making your payments. So that’s really the one big key distinction. And I would say that obviously, even if they’re giving you the option to suspend payments that that’s not necessarily something you should do if your income hasn’t changed and you still are able to make the payments. The other thing that they mentioned is that they’re not going to report delinquent payments to the credit bureaus if you’re going to stop making your payments during that time. Although that is an issue, actually, with people with federal loans under the CARES Act as there have been some cases reported with that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we talked about that on Episode 153. And from everything that I can tell, that has been resolved. So some people saw a short-term ding on their credit. And that has been I think corrected. But always a good reminder to be checking your credit and your credit score. And hopefully those issues have been resolved. So Tim, based on what we’ve talked about, to be clear, what we’ve said here is most pharmacists should not be refinancing during this time period where we have the provisions of the CARES Act. Assuming that the majority that are listening have qualifying federal loans. So is there any subset where in this time period, refinancing may make sense?

Tim Church: Yeah, I thought about this myself in terms of if I was in this position and I had already refinanced my loans, which I did a number of times, you know, is that something possible? So I think those who have already refinanced once or another time and they have private loans, I would say maybe. OK? So the stipulations that would go along with that is that obviously, whatever you’re going to refinance to, that those terms are manageable. Obviously, you’re looking for a better interest rate.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.
Tim Church: So you have to come out on top and it has to make sense from a mathematical standpoint. But also, you want to be able to make those payments and not have to stretch your budget so far. I think the other thing you have to really think about — and we’ve talked about this I think a couple times already — is that you’re not anticipating any change or loss in your income because again, especially if you refinance to a more aggressive term where your payment may actually increase, that’s even more reason that you really have to be pretty confident in that. Sometimes what’s kind of nice is that you might even be able to refinance to a term that’s longer than what you are with a better interest rate with the intention that you’re going to pay extra in order to come out ahead over time. So that’s obviously an option as well. I think the other thing is you have to look at your overall financial picture and look at what your goals are and what the priority is because especially if you’re someone who has credit card debt or other goals you’re trying to accomplish, maybe you’re not going to be as aggressive right now with your student loans, especially if you’re going to have to make a bigger payment. So I think that’s something you have to take into consideration as well.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, such a great reminder that student loans are a really important part but only one part of the financial plan, right? We talk about this with investing as well. Really, really important part of the financial plan, but it’s only one part of the financial plan so really taking a step back and I think speaks to the value of a financial planner and a coach that can help you really look at the big picture and determine how you’re going to prioritize and strategize. And I would point to — and credit to you, Tim, for the work that you’ve done in building out the resources. If our listeners are not already aware, head on over to YourFinancialPharmacist.com, lots of great information not only on refinancing but also calculators for refinancing and other tools that can help you determine what your savings could be if you choose that as a path forward. So at this time, I want to shift and do some rapid-fire refinance Q&A. So while we have you here, I want to tee off some of those common questions that I get, you know, from listeners or out speaking and talking to pharmacists related to refinancing. And a couple of them we’ve touched on, but I want to really directly answer them, so we’re going to go through these one-by-one. So first question I have for you is what factors do you consider when selecting a lender to refinance? So lots of options out there and, you know, how many should I be considering? Should I only be looking at one? And ultimately, how do I get to that decision of which one to work with?

Tim Church: You’re absolutely right. There’s so many options out there in the marketplace now. I think that the key thing is really to shop around and make sure you’re getting the best deal. It would be unfortunate that if you refinance but you could actually get a better deal with a different company. Obviously, that’s not the only thing to consider. But I would say that that’s one of the most important factors because obviously from a mathematical standpoint is you’re trying to get the best deal in order to save the most money over time. And that may also help you accelerate your payoff. So I think that’s huge. I think the other thing is if your loans — if the loans are going to be discharged on death or disability. And to me, I think that’s really important and a really good thing if the lender is offering that because again, if for some reason you became permanently disabled, could not make your payments, you don’t want your disability insurance check that you have coming going all towards your student loans or covering a big chunk of that. I mean, you need it to live. And that’s why even some of those policies, they have student loan riders built in there as differing payments that you would have on top of your monthly benefit. So I think that’s a really important thing. And the same thing with whether they’re forgiven on death because if you’re married, have a spouse or significant other or a cosigner, you really don’t want to have to leave that debt to somebody else. And obviously you can have life insurance in place, but it’s just another thing that I think is a good benefit when you’re looking at the lender. And I think just making sure they’re a reputable one. You can go to the Better Business Bureau, I think NerdWallet has a watch list of predatory lenders that are out there. But there’s some really big names, obviously, and you can check some of those out on our website.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think too in addition to the Better Bureau of Business rating, I think obviously you want to consider the consumer experience. And I would say it’s a great place to lean on the YFP community, jump in the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, ask them a question about your experiences with different lenders. You know, you want to make sure that they’re going to be responsive in addition to obviously the variables we mentioned of finding a product that has the best rates and ultimately the terms that you’re looking for. So Tim, you mentioned in that last response the importance of loans being discharged on death or permanent disability, which would match the benefit that one would have in the federal system. So I’m guessing some may be wondering, well, how do I know that? How do I find out if a private lender does offer that?

Tim Church: Well, we have the information on the lenders that we’ve partnered with. But obviously there’s a lot more out there. So I think trying to find their facts on their website is a good place to check, but sometimes they don’t even have that. I know that back when I was first analyzing different lenders and trying to refinance, I actually had to send emails out to the company for them to get that in writing through an email to say like, yes, this is true, this is something that we offer. So sometimes it’s always not the easiest thing to find on their website.

Tim Ulbrich: And you know, you mentioned in your story — going to the next question here — you mentioned in your story, refinancing more than once. And you know, I think that’s something that often gets overlooked. So tell us more about not only one, that being an option, but why people should consider doing that and how often they might consider re-evaluating.

Tim Church: Yeah, I think looking back — so I refinanced mine three times and my wife did three times as well. And the bottom line was that each time that we did that, we were able to get a better rate. And so it really just made sense to do that because it just became more competitive. I think I started out going from 6.8% down to maybe 4% or somewhere around there. And eventually got down in the low 3%s and then with First Republic got down to even 1.95%. So each time we were able to get some savings. And there really is no limit in terms of how often one can do that. I have heard some cases for people that do it like extremely often, like multiple times a month or every two months, that you could experience a temporary hit in your credit score. But overall, I mean, it can be very beneficial. I mean again, you’re just shifting to a different servicer for the most part. And as long as they have good service, you’re really just making the same payment, could be the same terms, but just a little bit of a better interest rate. And a lot of times, as mentioned before, they can incentivize you that when you switch to a different lender that they’re going to reward you with either some interest rate reduction but also possibly some kind of a welcome or cash bonus.

Tim Ulbrich: And to that point about multiple refinances having an impact on credit, tell us about your experiences. Did you see that have a short-term impact on your credit score?

Tim Church: I really didn’t. I think the soonest that I refinanced after doing it, I think I want to say 2-3 months was the earliest that I did once I made it happen. So I never did it more frequent than that, so I can’t speak to those who might be wanting to do it more frequently. But like I said, I’ve only heard of some case reports where people have noticed — and typically, they’re not huge dings in their credit score. They’re typically small. But I guess technically, it could be much larger I guess if it was something you were doing like every week. And for those that are listening, especially any of the recent graduates, the new graduates, one of the most common questions I get is, you know, how soon can I refinance? So considering the variables that a lender would be looking at, what have you typically seen in terms of what might be the good time period for one to consider applying for that first refinance?

Tim Church: Well, I think you really have to get your plan down pat first. I mean, that is the key because once you pull that trigger and refinance, I mean, you’re essentially disqualifying yourself for any forgiveness programs. And that’s one of the biggest mistakes that I made and that I shared in the book is that you have to know that because you have to know what you’re giving up by doing that. Now if you’re someone who you think you’re committed to the private sector and forgiveness is not going to be an option or your debt-to-income ratio isn’t significantly high, then yeah, then maybe it is something that you consider. Generally, lenders are not going to even allow you to refinance until you’ve proven income. And I think now, especially during the COVID time, they’re actually being stricter on who they’re going to lend money to and be able to refinance because it’s — I think I want to say one of the lenders, initially they only needed like your last paycheck or last two. And now they’re upping it to your last three paychecks to make sure that you’ve had consistent income. So a lot of times, you have to wait. I mean, I really wouldn’t even consider it during this time if you’re a new graduate and you have federal loans. You have the grace period anyway.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Church: But then on top of that, you have the CARES Act in place. You’re not forced to make any payments. So I would really just take the time, explore all of your options, make sure you know exactly what kind of position you’re going to take and how that’s going to impact your student loan options. And then, you know, once the grace period passes or you get to that point, then you can kind of decide which route you’re going to go.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, such a great reminder. For those that are or are not new or recent graduates, just the reminder that you want to have clarity on your repayment plan, so really determining the strategy first. And then if you get to the answer that refinance is best for you for whatever reason, obviously not in the moment likely for those that have qualifying federal loans but in the future, OK, then you start to go down the path. But you want to be crystal clear that that is the right path for your personal repayment strategy. Tim, last question I get asked all the time is how to apply with one of these private refinance lenders and I see they’re giving me fixed and variable rates to consider. Talk to me about what factors one should consider that would help them determine whether or not they may take the fixed option or the variable. And of course, we’re not specific rates here, so we don’t know what those rates are. But just generally speaking how to evaluate fixed versus variable rates.

Tim Church: Yeah, I think this is a tough one because like a lot of other products out there, even like mortgages, the variable rates are going to be very sexy, very flashy. They’re typically going to be lower than what fixed rates are available. And that can be very enticing to want to go that route. The problem is that if something happens in the market and rates significantly change, your payment can change and the amount that you pay in interest can significantly change. And it’s hard to predict into the future exactly how that’s going to fluctuate. Now, right now you might make the argument that most likely, we’re not going to see rates climb in the short term foreseeable future. But again, is that actually going to happen? It’s hard to exactly say. And if you’re even considering a variable rate, you want to know what the top end rate is going to be. Usually, there’s terms with regards to how frequent those rates can change but then also a maximum that you could pay in that situation. So I know there’s a lot of people that they’re comfortable with that level of risk and with that rate changing and the fact that they could refinance again to get out of it if needed. And certainly that’s one way to look at it. Me, I was never in that camp where I was comfortable with that risk, even if it was a small percentage improvement, I’m going fixed so I know exactly what’s coming out of my monthly budget or at least what the minimum payment is, and I’m not going to have any surprises along the way. So that made me feel really comfortable knowing that, even if it was, like I said, a little bit of a higher interest rate.

Tim Ulbrich: I think this is a good reminder for our listeners to check out our refinance calculator and tool on the YourFinancialPharmacist.com website and do the math. I mean, run the math on best case, worst case scenario of the variable rate. And, you know, to your point, really ask yourself what risk tolerance do you have but also what margin do you have in your budget? So you know, if you see that math on variable rate worst case scenario and you say, “Oo, I don’t know if I have the margin month-by-month for that difference,” then that might answer your question. But you know, if the rate difference is that significant, the savings are potentially that significant and you do have some margin, well then that might help inform which direction you take as well. So Tim Church, great stuff. And as a reminder to our community, “The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans,” our latest book authored by Tim Church, “How to confidently choose the best payoff strategy that saves you the most money,” pick up your copy today at PharmDLoans.com. It’s a great book whether you’re overwhelmed with student loans or confused about repayment plans that exist, unsure if the strategy that you have in place today is the best one or perhaps a new graduate trying to determine what strategy is the best one forward or those that are feeling anxious about how to handle loans during residency or during a financial hardship, this book is for you. I can attest to it. I’ve read it. I think it does a great job of talking through all of the repayment options and strategies and really presents a very complicated topic and presents it an easy-to-understand and more importantly, actionable way that’s all customized for the pharmacy professional and written by someone who has done it. No theory, no case studies, but actual execution. So again, you can pick up your copy today, PharmDLoans.com. Again, PharmDLoans.com. And as always, if you like what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please leave a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to your podcasts each and every week. Have a great rest of your day.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 155: Why You Need Professional Liability Insurance


Professional Liability Insurance for Pharmacists

Tim Baker talks through what professional liability insurance is, why it’s important, who needs it and what to look for when shopping for a policy.

Summary

On this episode sponsored by HPSO, Tim Baker discusses the ins and outs of professional liability insurance for pharmacy. Working as a pharmacist without professional liability insurance or malpractice insurance is a risk that could cost you your assets including your home or retirement and could also leave you bankrupt or with your wages being garnished.

He explains that insurance is essentially a risk transfer, meaning you’re moving the risk by contract from yourself to an insurance company. The company takes a premium from you and if an incident is filed, then the policy will pay you out. Tim says that facing a lawsuit for malpractice can be absolutely devastating to your financial plan and future independence, and the cost of the premium for professional liability insurance is so low that everyone should really look into being covered.

A liability insurance policy provides coverage in a number of areas, including $1 million for each claim, license protection, loss of wages, attorney fees, actions taken against you while volunteering or giving verbal advice, and claims from previous employers. If your employer offers liability insurance, Tim says that this is more of a perk and not a plan. The employer policy is there to protect the institution and not necessarily the employee. If you have an employer plan, you need to find out if the coverage is high enough to cover all of the employees and if it will protect your license or provide money for lost wages or board hearings.

Tim shares that when shopping or evaluating a policy, it’s best to work with an insurance provider who is plugged into your profession. He says that you have to also look at what is being covered, how easy it is to set up, the education provided and how good their customer service is. He recommends HPSO as they insure over 100,000 pharmacists, lead in terms of education and are sponsored by APhA. You can learn more about HPSO here.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: On the day of the incident, the patient was admitted to the hospital due to nausea and vomiting to rule out possible gallbladder disease. The admitting provider ordered Reglan 5 milligrams IV push four times per day. The Reglan did not relieve the patient’s nausea, so the nurse requested the provider change to another drug. The provider discontinued the Reglan and order Promethazine 25 milligrams IV push four times a day. After the medication order was received and reviewed by the pharmacy, it was delivered to the medical floor. The nurse administered the medication via IV push in less than one minute, and that was undiluted. The patient immediately experienced pain, complaining that his left wrist felt like it was on fire. The nurse flushed the IV site several times after administering the Promethazine and stated the pain would subside in a few minutes. About an hour later, the patient’s IV site was noticeably swollen and continued to hurt. The nurse made the decision to remove the IV and notify the admitting practitioner of the patient’s complaints. Initially, the patient’s practitioner treated the IV infiltration conservatively. However, over the next several hours, the patient developed progressive swelling, discoloration, and numbness. Once it was determined that the patient had developed compartmental syndrome, he was urgently taken to surgery for decompression of the compartments of the left hand and surgery of the left hand. After surgery, the patient developed sepsis and was transferred to a higher acuity care hospital, which had a hand surgeon who took over the patient’s care. After his physiological status improved, he underwent two additional surgeries. He was then discharged home with daily wound care and physical therapy to be performed by a home health provider. Currently, the patient has very limited motor control over his left wrist and arm due to contractures and nerve damage from the compartment syndrome. He experiences a constant aching in his extremities as well as severe burning, stabbing and electric shock-like pain, which is associate with complex regional pain syndrome. Because his injury occurred to his dominant hand, he was unable to return to work as an aircraft mechanic and was forced into disability. The nurse, pharmacist on duty, director of pharmacy, and hospital were all included in the lawsuit. Allegations against pharmacists on duty included failure to provide written and/or oral instructions on the causative effects of Promethazine when given IV as well as providing a causative medication Promethazine in undiluted form without any instructions as to how to appropriately dilute and administer the medication. Allegations made against the director of pharmacy included his failure to establish a pharmacy policy on Promethazine detailing how to administer the medication safely. The hospital declared bankruptcy prior to filing the lawsuit, leaving the two insurers as the main defendants. During deposition, the nurse testified that he was unaware how to administer Promethazine and dependent on the pharmacist and the pharmacy department to provide medication safety instructions and warning. Both insurers acknowledged during their depositions that they understood how caustic Promethazine can be if it extravagates into the tissues and how serious consequent injuries can be. Neither could explain why a pharmacy protocol had never been developed for Promethazine administration. The likelihood of prevailing at trial was estimated to be between 35-40%. A collective settlement was made on behalf of the pharmacist on duty and the director of pharmacy with indemnity payments and expenses in excess of $740,000. Wow. Tim Baker, when you hear that story, if that is your client, whether it be the pharmacist or the director of pharmacy, what are the implications for them personally and to their financial plan?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think it’s devastating. That type of catastrophic loss is — it’s almost impossible to come back from. So you know, from a personal perspective, obviously your heart goes out to the patient that was negatively affected for the rest of their life and obviously losing a lot of function in the hand and everything. But from the client perspective, you know, this is a — obviously it’s a shot in the arm, to say the least, with regard to the ability to grow wealth. You know, this is probably looking at wiping out assets like a home, retirement savings, you’re probably looking at bankruptcy yourself, garnishes of wages, even the likelihood of return to pharmacy in some form or fashion is probably gone. So what most of us are striving to, and it’s really our mission, is to help pharmacists achieve financial independence. That’s going to be different for a lot of people. Regardless, a loss like this is going to put a dent in that no matter how you define financial dependence. So this is one where, you know, when I first read through this case study — and I’m not a pharmacist — like it gave me anxiety because you’re just thinking like you could see where this was going. And it’s devastating. That’s the word that comes to midn the most.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think, Tim, you know, as we continue to see the pharmacist’s role expand, which is a great thing for our profession and great thing I think for patients as we know the expertise they can bring to the medical team, I think we’re going to see more and more opportunities where the expansion of that role leads to pharmacists being brought into lawsuits, right?

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So we’re now obviously seeing a good evolution away from just the distribution function of the medication, which in and of itself can bring potential errors and lawsuits that we have I think been well versed in and know of. But when you start to get into the clinical realms and the variety of clinical roles that we’re seeing pharmacists play, that certainly is going to expand. And I think it’s helpful to hear stories. This is one example, so I know our hospital pharmacists listening are going to hear this and say, yeah, you know, they can see this. They can visualize, they can relate to it. And I know when I was in school and we were taught about professional liability insurance, like it’s just hard to wrap my arms around like what would this be? And what are the situations? And how really significant is this risk? And so I think it’s helpful to hear examples, and this is one. You know, there’s some other examples that we highlighted in “Seven Figure Pharmacist” that have involved a pharmacist, a prostate gland suppository (?) that’s given instead of Progesterone that resulted in premature delivery of an infant that had neurological complications, a man who obtained sensitive medical information about his wife without her consent, a young child who received propylthiouracil instead of mercaptopurine that resulted in recurrence of leukemia and eventually in death. So these are unfortunate but true stories of pharmacists’ errors. And these errors obviously can result in significant financial implications. And so I think it’s important, Tim, that we take a step back and just think about what is insurance? So here, we’re talking about professional liability, but health, home, auto, life, disability, we’ve talked about many of those on the show. What’s the basic definition and purpose of insurance and the role that it plays in the financial plan?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so this — what insurance really is is it’s risk transfer. So we’re essentially moving the risk of some — so a risk is basically a condition where there’s a possibility of at least two outcomes: one being undesirable. And typically, those undesirable outcomes, you know, they’re losses. So this could be a loss of income, this could be a loss in a lawsuit where you have a liability to pay. The loss is really that disappearance or reduction in value. So what we do is, you know, we transfer that risk by contract from ourselves, the individual, to an insurance company. And basically, the insurance company is taking the premium, so this is what we pay for the policies, and they’re using the rule of large numbers. So basically the group is paying for these policies, and then if one member of the group has a loss, then you know, that’s where the policy pays out. So you know, a lot of us when we think about insurance, we use different methods to manage that risk. So you know, the big one that we’re talking about here is transfer the risk, but you know, a lot of us, we retain that or we self-insure. The example that I give for self-insurance is we have Benji the dog. And Benji, we looked at pet insurance, but we knew that those premiums would go up, so we just have an Ally account where we would have put those premiums toward that policy, we self-insure that risk.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: You know, there’s ways to avoid it. So like if you’re not in hospital pharmacy, we’ll talk about maybe some of the careers in pharmacy where you don’t need it. But at the end of the day, you know, this is something that is so — it can be so devastating. And I think the tradeoff in terms of the cost of the premium for professional liability that we’re talking about today, it’s almost — I don’t want to say it’s a no-brainer, but it’s almost a no-brainer. And if you are unsure because of where pharmacy practice is evolving and headed, I would buy a policy because it’s very cheap. And the downside is so great. So — and I think one of the things that we want to talk about here is you know, and it’s evident in this case, is there’s an over — we have an over-reliance or we make assumptions about our employer that aren’t true. So I know I’ve worked with some big companies and big organizations, and you think that walking in there that everything is pristine, there’s a policy and a procedure for this and that and your employer is always out for your best interest. And unfortunately, it’s not the case. You know, there are lots of things that we do in life, and I think that you’re going to see this just as hospital systems become more stressed where things are kind of — you wing it in some cases. There are things that change, and that’s a harsh reality. But I think in this case, it’s like, well, we never had that policy and procedure. You’re assuming the next guy down the line, maybe the nurse that is administering knows what they’re doing, but we make assumptions here. And you know what my mom said about when you assume, it’s not necessarily something that’s going to turn out well. So yeah, I mean, we can definitely go through the professional liability and why it’s important and what it is. But at the end of the day, if we look at this broad strategic part of the financial plan that is the protection of the financial plan, this piece of insurance that’s with insurance in general is going to be so important because things just happen that we don’t expect. And you can’t self-insure everything. You have to have that rule of that group to basically help shoulder that for you. So that’s really the purpose of insurance.

Tim Ulbrich: Great definition overview. And you know, I was just thinking as you were talking, in the pharmacies that I’ve worked in and many that are listening can relate if you’re working in a traditional community retail setting, the number of prescriptions you touch per day and you extrapolate that out to a week or a year and the number of patients that you interact with per day or if you’re in a hospital setting up on a floor distributing in a hybrid role, it doesn’t matter. Just from a statistical standpoint, when you talk about the risk and the things that could happen along the way, obviously there is risk that can be had there and making sure that you’re protected and the rest of your financial plan. But let’s be honest, even when we talk about a policy that is relatively inexpensive relative to the coverage it provides, nobody wants to pay for insurance. And I think for many, myself included, the thought of paying for something that may or may not bear fruit in terms of providing a benefit can be frustrating. And unfortunately, because of these feelings, I think many people forego implementing proper insurance coverage. So Tim, generally speaking, how do you work with clients to find this balance of ensuring the right insurance protection and that that is in place while they are trying to prioritize other goals such as paying down student loans, investing, or saving for a home?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think there’s this misnomer that working with a financial adviser — and I think maybe it’s not a misnomer because I think, you know, we’ve earned it in some regard — there’s this misnomer that it’s all about growth of assets, invest, invest, invest. You know? And for a lot of pharmacists, you know, when they think about insurance, they’re left with a bad taste in their mouth because probably during pharmacy school, just like many physicians and other healthcare providers, you know, there’s this push by financial professionals like me to sell you a crappy whole life policy or something like that. So you’re already kind of from Jump Street a little bit wary of it. And to your point, Tim, a lot of people can view it as a sunk cost. So this is the idea that money that you’re spending towards these premiums cannot be recovered. And I think you’re really — it’s missing the point. And one of the analogies — or one of the examples I give is we talk about whole life, these are policies that are typically more expensive. And a lot of whole life advocates will say, “Well, term insurance, they only pay out 4% of the time.” But the point is that they did their job. Most of the — if you have insurance and you have a 30-year policy and you live beyond that policy, like you were protected during those 30 years. And it did exactly what it needed to do. And the same is true for professional liability. It’s like you don’t want to have a claim, even if you’re covered. You don’t want to have a claim. But you want to have that — the insurance is that safety net so you’re not in the poorhouse, your assets are protected, you’re not filing for bankruptcy. So what we say, you know, and kind of it’s just our messaging, every time we meet a client, like our mantra, our thing is how can we help you, the client, grow and protect your income, grow and protect your net worth, while keeping your goals in mind? And the protection is so much baked into the insurance piece, the estate plan, those types of things. But we want to make sure that we’re doing both of those things, not just growing the assets because we want to make sure that we are accounting for those dark moments. And I think we as humans, we sometimes suffer from the optimism bias, which is a cognitive bias that causes someone to believe that they themselves, Tim Baker, oh, I’m not going to experience a loss. I’ll never have anything; that’s going to be someone else, you know, a faceless person in the crowd. It’s never going to be me until it’s me. I often hear on repeat, “Hey, my employer has me covered. I’m not worried about it.” And that could be not just from professional liability but it could also be from life and disability insurance. So at the end of the day, what we say is insurance provided by your employer, it’s not a plan. It’s a perk. So we, if we’re doing this financial planning thing the right way, it’s just something that we have to bake into it. Now, when I say for things like life insurance, typically the things I say is for life insurance to make sense, it’s typically you have to have a spouse, a house and mouths to feed. Sometimes people that are single, they don’t have a house, they don’t have dependents, maybe it doesn’t make sense unless they have loans that are not going to be forgiven upon death. So the same thing with professional liability. We want to make sure that it makes sense for the scope of practice that they’re in and that they have things that could potentially be lost. But you know, for the most part, it is something that you want to take a hard look at if you’re a pharmacist. And I kind of hearken back, Tim, to the story that was done about kind of the — I know they interviewed a community pharmacist, and I’m blanking on who wrote the story, but the amount of scripts that that pharmacist filled in one day, it was like it’s crazy. So there’s potentially going to be mistakes, and those mistakes could have far-reaching effects. So you know, again, strategically it’s something that we definitely, we need to work through all those different parts of the insurance and make sure that we are properly covered in that regard.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, to that point, you know, just like health and life and disability, we’re trying to determine who needs it and how much do they need? So talk to us — and you alluded to this a little bit already — when it comes to professional liability insurance from your point, who needs to be evaluated and what considerations should they have as they’re doing that evaluation?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, when we’re looking at professional liability, basically what this is, it’s coverage for a pharmacist that provides protection in the event a claim is made against the pharmacist involved in an actual or alleged or admission while carrying out his or her duties that are within the scope of practice for a pharmacist. And the hard part is that the scope of practice is a moving target. And it’s going to be defined by your respective state, so in your state licensing board. So again, it’s not necessarily a black-and-white issue for a pharmacist in whatever state USA. So to me, from our viewpoint is the idea is that if you are a practicing pharmacist and you’re interacting with patients, if you’re volunteering, if you’re giving advice, like I said, when we talk about side hustling a lot, there are a lot of pharmacists that they might moonlight and work in a hospital pharmacy. These are all instances that expose you to risk that you want to cover. And even policies — even claims that come up where hey, you worked at a hospital and now you don’t work there anymore and a lawsuit is filed, you’re not necessarily going to be covered under that employer plan, so having your own policy is kind of what we’re looking for. So to me, again, it’s going to depend on kind of what the day-to-day is of the pharmacist. Now, I can say — I kind of admit here most of the time, I would say probably 90% of the time, I say this is something that you really should consider if these are some of the blocks that you’re checking off. And part of that is because they are very inexpensive. But you know, these are going to be policies that for many of our listeners is going to be something that we want to have in play for sure.

Tim Ulbrich: And I’m glad you mentioned the piece about scope of practice because that is a moving target. You know, in Ohio, we’ve seen changes to scope of practice, significant changes, that have happened in the last 12 months. And I expect we’ll see that continue to happen as other states are. So in my conversations with some of these providers, I think we’re going to see these policies catch up to scope of practice, but many of them are not there yet. And so there’s a pretty standard policy that you’ll see. But obviously a pharmacist’s role in Setting A versus B versus C can be very, very different. So I think that’s an important consideration that people are thinking about. So anytime you’re purchasing a policy, again, whether it’s life, disability or home, auto, here professional liability, it’s good to know not only the purpose but what it’s going to do in the event that you need it. So if I’m purchasing a professional liability policy, what benefit would there be? What would it ultimately cover in the event that my employer, any coverage through my employer, may not be doing exactly what I need it to do?

Tim Baker: So typically, you know, the big thing here is it’s going to cover the — basically the professional liability itself. So you know, typically these policies will cover you for $1 million for each claim, $3 million in aggregate liability policies. So if you have a judgment against you, and in this case it was I think right around — what? — $750,000, you know, if you have this policy and it’s going to cover you — like your part of that is going to be covered by the professional liability. If you don’t, then that’s again when you are dipping into retirement, selling your house, that type of thing. License protection — so sometimes these issues don’t go to lawsuit, they’ll go to the licensing board. And you’re having to protect yourself with attorneys and things like that and investigation. So they’ll cover you a certain amount of money each year for those types of claims. It could be loss of wages. It could be for, again, hiring an attorney for your defense. It could be for, you know, just actions taken against you while providing pharmacy services while volunteering or giving Uncle Dave verbal advice or claims brought against you from a previous employer. So these are all things — and again, at the end of the day, the policies that your employer has are for your employer. They cover you by extension because you are an extension of your employer. So but at the end of the day, they are there to protect the institution, not you. And you know, there can be some certain instances where you think you’re covered and you’re not. So things to think about, you know, with regard to your employer’s policy is the coverage they have high enough for all your coworkers? So if that judgment that we talked about in the case study was $5 million, as an example, like would that be able to cover everyone? Does it cover your lost wages or licensing board hearings or things like that? Does it cover outside of work? Most of the time, it will not. They don’t want that liability. And what happens if you’re employed? So at the end of the day, it’s going to provide you with your own counsel, your own attorney. It’s going to pay all the reasonable costs incurred during the defense and investigation and cover for lost wages because this is something that’s going to take up time. You know, you’re going to be probably not practicing or not able to. So these are some of the things that you’re going to be looking or be covered when these policies are in place and definitely good to have your own.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, what about those that are listening to this show that are self-employed, work as an independent consultant, or work part-time for another employer in addition to their full-time job? How does this come into play?

Tim Baker: It’s definitely — yes. Like yes, yes and more yes. So I would say definitely look at the professional liability. So you know, this is going to cover you for professional pharmacy services outside of your employer setting, as long as it’s within the regular duties and activities of scope of practice. So again, that’s the moving target, and that’s the challenge to organizations like HPSO and some of the other ones that provide because it’s — or provide these types of policies — because it is ever-changing, and it’s changing by state. So but the best thing that you can do, what’s in your span of control is to buy the policy, purchase the policies that are there and just make sure that you are operating within the scope of practice of the state that you are practicing as a pharmacist. And for some people, I would venture to say a lot of people don’t know that. So maybe the second part of that is just to say, “OK, what is in bounds? What is out of bounds?”

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: And again, it’s something that you don’t — to reiterate the point — you don’t want to make the assumption, right? You don’t want to make the assumption that you’re covered or what you’re doing is because that’s how it’s always been done because things change and assumptions are made, and that’s typically where people run into a problem.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, one area we haven’t talked much about, if at all, on this show before is where umbrella policies fit in and don’t fit in and really, what type of coverage they provide. And here, I’m thinking, as many may be wondering, if I have an umbrella policy or if I don’t and I were to get one, is that applicable at all here in terms of additional coverage if a professional liability issue would come up? So talk to us about not only that question but maybe some intro first into what are umbrella policies.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so an umbrella policy is an extra liability insurance coverage that typically goes beyond the limits of your property and casualty insurance. So property and casualty insurance being typically homeowners and an auto policy. So I’ve heard this before where, you know, someone will say “Well, I don’t necessarily need professional liability because I have an umbrella policy that covers me.” And I would say just separate lanes here. Just like life insurance is a separate lane from disability insurance, an umbrella policy, separate lane. It’s still liability, but we’re talking about kind of the personal liability side versus the professional liability side. So you know, typically, people that have umbrella policies have maxed out their homeowners and auto liability coverages. So typically, the maximum you can purchase for a personal liability policy under homeowners is like $500,000, you know, $250,000 per person, $500,000 per accident. And then you know, the same is true with the auto is kind of along those lines. So once you reach out to your auto provider and you max out those coverages, then they might say, “Hey, because of your profession or because of this or that, you have rental properties, do you want additional coverage?” which is very, very inexpensive just to go be above and beyond that. So there’s a little bit of a misnomer that if you have an umbrella policy, you’ll be covered from a professional liability. And they’re typically separate lanes with regard to the financial plan. So those, you know, those are policies that are going to really just sit on top of what you already have from auto and homeowners.

Tim Ulbrich: Last thing I want to talk about is just the actual purchasing, shopping, evaluating process. And we’ve talked before on the show and on the blog about when you shop for life and disability insurance — and we talked about this on episodes 044 and 045 of the show — how complex that process can be in terms of the range of options that are available, you have a whole host of different riders and often, you may not feel like you’re comparing apples to apples. And I think when people go into that shopping process, they can quickly get overwhelmed and maybe never get past that to be able to actually purchase what they need or end up with something that might be more than what they need. So what is really different here in terms of a pharmacist who’s looking to evaluate a professional liability insurance policy?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, I hate to say that sometimes insurance can be a bit of a commodity, you know, and I think one of the reasons that we like HPSO in particular is I think they do lead in terms of education, which I kind of hold near and dear to my heart because I’m a big believer in the better educated the client will be, the better client you will be. So but I think also, you know, you want to work with a provider here, an insurance provider here that’s plugged into the profession. So — and I can say I’ve worked with different ones over the years and I feel like I’m really looking to point clients in the direction where they’re going to be responded to and good customer service and all that type of stuff. So I think the big thing is in terms of policies is what is actually being covered? And am I educated in terms of what my risks are and what my coverage is, you know, to mitigate those risks? And then how easy are they to get to set up? And then how confident am I in the ability to — the policies to ebb and flow and evolve over time? So HPSO is for health providers, it’s in the name. So we want to make sure that we’re working with a provider that kind of checks those blocks and makes sure that our listeners, our clients, are covered in the uneventful — or unhappy time that could be a judgment against you because of a professional liability error.

Tim Ulbrich: As we wrap up this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, I want to again thank our sponsor, HPSO. HPSO is the leading provider of professional liability coverage, insuring more than 100,000 pharmacists nationwide and sponsored by the American Pharmacists Association. As I mentioned before, when I was a practicing pharmacist, I carried my malpractice insurance through HPSO. And with individual policies for qualified persons starting at just under $150 per year, it’s a no-brainer compared to the cost of a claim and worth the extra peace of mind. Plus, discounts are available for qualified students and recent grads. So head on over to HPSO.com/YFP to learn more. Again, HPSO.com/YFP. And as always, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please do us a favor and leave a rating and review in Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to your podcasts each and every week. Have a great rest of your day.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 147: How One Pharmacist is Turning Tragedy Into Triumph


How One Pharmacist is Turning Tragedy Into Triumph

Phillip Beach, Director of Pharmacy at Arkansas Continued Care, talks about his career journey, his path toward financial independence, and the start of the Harper Faith Foundation, a 501(c)3 non-profit that was founded in memory of his daughter Harper Faith Beach who was born with hypoplastic left heart syndrome (HLHS).

Summary

In this episode, Phillip shares about his career path, the why behind his and his wife’s FIRE journey, and the start of the Harper Faith Foundation in memory of his daughter.

Phillip graduated in 2017 from Harding University College of Pharmacy and began working at NEA Baptist the following week with a 7 on/7 off night shift for about two years. Through networking on LinkedIn, Phillip was able to take a PRN position which led to his current full-time Director of Pharmacy position at Arkansas Continued Care.

Unfortunately, on September 11, 2018, his life forever changed. His daughter, Harper Faith, passed away due to hypoplastic left heart syndrome (HLHS), a congenital heart disease she had been battling with for four months. Phillip shares how he and his wife grieved, how his outlook on life has altered and what their focus is on financially because of their tragic loss.

Philip and his wife wanted to help other heart families and formed the Harper Faith Foundation. The foundation supports others by promoting research, giving inpatient gift bags full of toiletries and other necessities to make long-term hospital stays a bit easier, and offers a yearly college scholarship to a high school senior with a congenital heart defect.

Phillip shares that he and his wife are moving to a FIRE approach with their finances and life because they want to have more time and freedom to do what they want.

More About Harper Faith Foundation

About Harper Faith Foundation: In January of 2019, Phillip and his wife, Tori, founded the 501c3 nonprofit organization “Harper Faith Foundation” in memory of their daughter, Harper Faith Beach, who was born with hypoplastic left heart syndrome (HLHS). Their mission is to spread awareness for congenital heart defects and to help out families who are battling HLHS. They are dedicated to turning tragedy into triumph.

HFF helps heart families by doing the following:

1) Yearly college scholarship to a congenital heart disease survivor

2) Donating funds (Ronald Mcdonald house, CVICU @Arkansas Childrens Hospital, directly to those in need)

3) Giving gift bags to those currently staying in the CVICU (gift bags include the following: children’s books, newborn socks, newborn side snap onesies, pacifier, newborn stuffed animal, toiletries for both mom and dad – shampoo, conditioner, bodywash, face wipes, toothbrush and toothpaste, lotion. The bags also contain a water bottle, kleenex, individual Tide laundry packs, notebook, pen, and a binder to help organize medical documents and information.

4) Supporting research at Mayo Clinic – participation in 2 clinical studies (studying DNA, cord blood stem cell injection into the heart during surgery).

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. It’s an honor to have joining me Phillip Beach, a recent graduate of Harding University College of Pharmacy and Director of Pharmacy at Arkansas Continued Care. On today’s episode, we’re going to talk about really an unimaginable journey that Phillip and his wife had had over the past couple years with the loss of their daughter Harper Faith at a very, very young age to a congenital heart condition. And we’re going to talk, yeah, we’ll talk a little bit about Phillip’s career journey, a little bit about their financial journey, but we’re going to talk most about that journey of loss, that journey of grief. What were the strategies that allowed them to come together to get through that difficult time? And we’re also going to talk about what they are doing going forward with the starting of the Harper Faith Foundation, a 501(c) not-for-profit organization that’s designed to help families and research that is related to the condition that took their daughter at such a young age. So Phillip, thank you so much for taking time to join me on this week’s episode. And welcome to the show.

Phillip Beach: Thanks, Tim. I’m very excited to be here and share our story. So thank you for having me on.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s start our conversation with your journey into pharmacy school and the current work that you’re doing.

Phillip Beach: So I got started in pharmacy 2017. I graduated and I took a 7-on, 7-off night shift position at NEA Baptist in northeast Arkansas. And so I did night shift for a little under two years, and that was a great time. Got to work with a good friend of mine and it was a huge learning experience. So I learned a ton, got my feet wet in that role and really learned what hospital setting was all about as a pharmacist straight out of school. Currently, I am Director of Pharmacy at Arkansas Continued Care Hospital. We’re considered a long-term acute care. We’re a 44-bed facility, and I am the full-time pharmacist. We have one full-time technician with me as well. Census is typically 20-25, somewhere in that area. So we stay busy. We just implemented Omnicells about a year ago, so we’ve been getting that process down and really enjoying that over doing cart fill, which is a nice change. And as you can imagine, it is a smaller place, so I get to wear a bunch of different hats and it keeps me constantly learning. And there’s just so much to do and so much to learn. It’s been great. And the community is small, so I’m getting to know the nurses and the leadership and the physicians, everyone, way more than I did at a larger hospital.

Tim Ulbrich: So as we’re recording, we’re in the middle of the COVID-19 pandemic, so thank you to you and your team that are on the frontlines of this and going to work each and every day. And it sounds like as we talked about before we hit record, you all haven’t been as impacted yet, at least, right, by the pandemic?

Phillip Beach: Yes, sir. So we’re — the models currently look like around towards the end of this month, around the 26 is what we’re expecting. So we’re preparing for that, doing a lot of education on PPE donning and doffing, obviously trying to get any supplies we can get and also doing emergency preparedness with the other hospitals in this region, kind of combined forces and see how many ventilators we have and what we can do when it does come.

Tim Ulbrich: So Phillip, when I think about a leadership role at a smaller institution like you’re at — and as you mentioned, you wear lots of different hats — I think about, you know, when you’re in that size of an organization, obviously a time like this, you’re thinking about emergency preparedness types of things. But even just in not a time like this, normal operations, you’re probably wearing a financial hat, a human resource hat, operations hat. And how does one prepare themself for that? Or maybe a better question is how do you get an opportunity like that, you know, right out of school, graduating in 2017, without advanced residency training or additional academic degrees?

Phillip Beach: Well, I’ve had a lot of great mentors. So his name was Byron at my previous job, he was a really good boss. So I got to learn and watch him while I was on night shift for almost two years. And then my current boss, Charlie, has been fantastic in helping mentor me into this role and leading me on the path as a director. And then like I said, the leadership team at our hospital as well, getting to be involved and watching them and learning from people that have been here longer than me and know what they’re doing and really learning leadership styles. It’s been very helpful to watch them. But the amount of hats that you wear, really, it just comes with time doing it. So the longer that you’re in it, the more you learn. And you know, literally I am learning stuff every day and there’s just so much to improve upon constantly so that I feel like my work will never end, which is a good thing. It keeps me having new goals constantly. There’s always something I can work on, antibiotic stewardship or policies and procedures or nailing down our therapeutic interchanges, there’s just so much I can do on a daily basis that I enjoy.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and as you know, once you land a position like that, as time goes on in your career, the lack of having a residency training or additional degree is going to matter less and less. And I want our students listening to hear, you know, what I heard is really two years of a willingness to learn, night shift, I’m not sure many people are willing to do night shift for two years. I definitely hear a willingness and a desire to learn, hard work, seeking mentorship, so I think all of those things are incredibly important. So thank you for sharing.

Phillip Beach: Yeah, I’d also want to — I forgot to mention networking was huge. I actually found this position by networking on LinkedIn. And I reached out to the current Director of Pharmacy who had posted like a PRN shift work, and I was just looking for additional income. So at the time when I was 7-on, 7-off, you know, I had those seven days free. I was like, hey, I want a couple days extra work. So I reached out to her on LinkedIn, and that’s how the whole ball got rolling. And so I worked PRN filling in for her for a little over a year, about 14 months, and you know, when she left the job, it opened up to me and she recommended me for the position. So it’s crazy that networking and LinkedIn, how far that can go in today’s age. So I can’t emphasize that enough too for new grads.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, absolutely. And ironically, it’s a reminder to me that this interview came to be because of LinkedIn. So we had connected a while back when you were in pharmacy school, you helped us do some editing for the book “Seven Figure Pharmacist.” I think you might have been a P2, P3. And then I had seen you post a few months ago on LinkedIn some updates and work that you’re doing with the Harper Faith Foundation, and I was like, “Ah, that’s right! Phillip helped us with the book.” I think I had heard from you a couple other times via email and other things. So I think it’s just a good reminder of the power of networking and staying in touch with folks over a period of time. So Phillip, you graduate from pharmacy school in 2017, obviously your career is taking off at a very young age. And on September 11, 2018, life changes really forever. Tell us more.

Phillip Beach: So Harper was born May 21, 2018. She was born with half a heart, Hypoplastic Left Heart Syndrome. It’s just a big word for missing half your heart, basically. So the ventral valve, the left ventricle and the left atria did not form in the womb. So that whole left side of her heart was just not functioning, basically. So for these HLHS babies, they have a three-stage palliative surgery option that hopefully can basically extend the life and give you a quality of life and hopefully, it gets you to where you’re older and more stable to do a transplant is ultimately the goal. So there is not a cure. So that’s the path that we went down. So Harper was born the 21. She had open heart surgery on Day 4, 4 days old. She did really well. She conquered that surgery and stayed on intubated and on the vent for about a month. So we couldn’t hold her for that whole first month. And it was extremely just difficult, as anyone could imagine. And we stayed in the hospital altogether about two months straight. And here I am, working 7-on, 7-off night shifts. So I did use my PTO and a week here, week there. And my wife is staying there 24/7. She was the one there all the time while I was here at work. So it was very difficult, and during those two months, she got better, you know. Everything was going good. We were able to be discharged. So we got to bring her home for a month. And everything was great. Daily weights, there was a very close monitoring program that we actually had on the iPad from Arkansas Children’s Hospital. We’d take videos daily, monitor their weight. We’re literally writing down how many mils that she’s drinking every two or three hours throughout the day. So tracking it down to the milliliter, literally, and journaling that. So while the experience to monitor to make sure that they’re being fed right and that their fluid electrolyte balance in perfect, and it’s such a critical thing in these heart babies where something as small as that fluid and electrolyte difference can make a huge impact. So that month goes on while we have her home and it’s time for heart cath, just to check her heart function. So we go to the hospital and do this heart cath, and after that procedure, her heart developed a tricuspid regurgitation, so some blood flow was leaking out of that valve. And it never recovered. And it got to be severe tricuspid regurg. So she was basically in heart failure at that point and we had to start her on continuous IV drips for her heart function. And so this was about three months of age, and we were basically stuck inpatient there at that point thinking about the transplant list. So we’re meeting with the transplant team and organizing, getting all that set up, getting blood types, getting her registered. And Harper coded multiple times. And come to find, she had undiagnosed sepsis as well as heart failure. And she passed away on 9/11/2018. So at this point, it’s really just devastating for my wife and I. It totally just changes your life. And everything that you know as a parent, your routine, your role, everything just changes instantly. So as long as — as well as your identity. So everything as a parent, you know, is gone instantly. And it’s just major shock. So going through that grief and that entire process, working 7-on, 7-off, that was very difficult spending those seven nights away from my wife ultimately. So that’s what led me to this daytime Director of Pharmacy position was to be able to spend more time with my family and with my wife. So during that grieving process, that was a key, getting to spend more time together as both of us were going through that process.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and Phillip, I’m sure our listeners are thinking the same. My heart breaks for you and your wife. And just the situation as a father, I can’t even imagine what you guys went through. And I have to believe that we have one, two, 10, 100, maybe more people that are listening that are going through some type of grief or loss right now. You know, maybe it’s a similar situation, maybe it’s a job loss, maybe it’s a loss of a parent, a loss of a spouse, a loss of a child or something else. What words of encouragement would you have to share for somebody listening that is going through a moment of grief or loss right now?

Phillip Beach: Well, that’s my hope coming on here to talk to you today is that I can somehow spread a message of positivity to at least one person and impact their life and help them through whatever struggle they’re going through, to just make that choice every day to stay positive and know that these trials and things you go through will make you a better person in the end. And you never know who you can impact by choosing that positivity every day. And I’m not saying that I always win that battle. But every day, I try to make that conscious effort to be positive. And I think that is the key. And I know we talked about Adam Martin before, but he actually had a video on this I think yesterday that I saw between two different pharmacists, one choosing not being positive and the other being positive and being a great leader in their pharmacy. And I think that’s so key is making that choice daily, wanting to impact others and being a leader in that positivity to spread it to others. No one wants to be around a negative person. So I hope I can be that same light to someone that’s going through a tough situation.

Tim Ulbrich: And what gives you and your wife hope? What gave you hope through that time period of obviously losing Harper? But I sense this is something daily that you’re working through. Like what gives you guys hope going forward?

Phillip Beach: You know, really, we started Harper Faith Foundation, and that was one of the things that we could transform this tragedy into something triumphant. That was — that’s our goal to spread some hope to someone else that needs it. So we made the Harper Faith Foundation a nonprofit organization in January 2019. My wife started it up, did all the research, figured out how to do it, contacted LegalZoom, got that set up, it’s all official. And the outpouring that we’ve had from our community and our friends and our church and our support group, our family, to give back to us so that we can give out to others has been amazing. So that has been a source of hope for us. And being able to spread it to other people, that gives us joy. So ultimately, there’s nothing like giving back to other people. You don’t get that sense of joy from anything else.

Tim Ulbrich: And Phillip, one of the other things as I think through others that may be going through a situation of loss or grief would be that this topic of finance in and of itself is stressful, let alone when you’re going through a difficult situation. So talk us through for a moment about how you keep the financial plan afloat during a time of grief. Or maybe a better question is how do you give yourself permission or peace to just let it go temporarily, you know, in the midst of everything that you’re dealing with?

Phillip Beach: It’s definitely a balancing act. And I think it’s so key to live below your means in a lot of areas of your life but also realize that life is very fleeting and when you have something that you enjoy as a family to go and enjoy that and not worry about it. And realize that you have money to spend and go out and enjoy, go on vacation with your family, spend that time together, do what you can while you’re on your own because you don’t always have that time later down the road. And that’s another part of my life that I want to touch on. My dad unexpectedly passed in 2016 when I was right about to start my rotations. I was literally about three or four days from going to my first acute care rotations in Texas, he unexpectedly had a heart attack at 56. He was in great shape, he was ex-military. And that has also stuck with me and just convinced me that, you know, the balancing act and using your time while you have it because you can save for your 401k all day and all that, but it’s not a for sure thing that you’re going to live to 65 to get to enjoy it. So I definitely encourage people to be wise with their money but at the same time enjoy it and love your family and go and do the things that you like to do together.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes, such a good reminder, Phillip, of the balance of today versus the future, right? There’s responsibility in taking care of your future self but not fully at the expense of today and the needs that are around you but also as you mentioned just the experiences and the opportunities that you have of things to do. So I think that balance is so critical. So I think you answered this a little bit, you know, in that context of that balance of today and the future, but tell us a little bit more about as a guy who I sense is a financial nerd, right, you know, you’re kind of saving, balancing debt, and the questions you ask, how does money have a different meaning for you after you go through such a obviously situation of grief and loss such as that you did?

Phillip Beach: I think now, we’re more focused on giving back. And when we have extra funds, we don’t necessarily set aside a certain percentage or anything but you know, just kind of sporadically my wife will be like, “Hey, why don’t we help this family out?” Or, “Hey, why don’t we go up to Arkansas Children’s this weekend and bring them lunch?” Those are the kind of things that we like to do just on a whim. And that’s what we’re more focused on these days is giving back, doing what we can, as little as bringing someone that Chick-Fil-A at lunch in the hospital. It might not seem like much, but to them, that’s like — it’s a really big thing when these families are stuck inpatient for 3, 6, 12 months at a time. Some of these families are on the transplant list, like I said, and they literally don’t get to leave. They eat cafeteria food day-in and day-out. They’re there with their sick child and something just like bringing a meal is very uplifting. So that’s what our focus is on now is just giving when we can.

Tim Ulbrich: Especially a Chick-Fil-A meal, right? That makes anyone happy.

Phillip Beach: I know, right?

Tim Ulbrich: You know, I think what resonates with me when you said that is yes, it’s the meal. But it’s the gesture. It’s letting people know they’re not alone, that there’s a community that’s thinking about them, that’s praying for them, that’s encouraging them. And I think the meal is maybe the vehicle in which you’re able to do that. But obviously there’s a broader intention there. So let’s shift and talk about the Harper Faith Foundation, a 501c not-for-profit organization. You mentioned your wife set it up, which is awesome and we’ll talk a little bit more about that as well. But let’s just break it down. What is the mission and the work of the Harper Faith Foundation?

Phillip Beach: So our mission is to help other heart families and kind of like you said, building that community. There is — other heart families, you just have this bond with no one else has kind of gone through this situation like these people have. So you understand each other. And that’s kind of what we are making and building with Harper Faith Foundation. We aim to help out other heart families. So that is our goal is to provide some hope to them during these tough times.

Tim Ulbrich: And specifically as I understand it, you guys are doing work in a variety of different ways, including supporting families — you talked a little bit about this — supporting families, but I think there’s some other components as well with research. So talk us through the specific areas of the work of the Harper Faith Foundation.

Phillip Beach: Yeah, so we help other families through a variety of ways. One of the things we like the most is promoting research. So we were actually involved with two studies with Mayo Clinic. They took stem cells from the umbilical cord blood when Harper was born and they froze them and they were planning to use those in the Stage 2 surgery and they were injecting them directly into the heart to try to make that side of the heart stronger, the right ventricle, so that it could kind of take over some of that workload that the left isn’t doing. That’s one of our joys is to help with the research process and try to find not necessarily a cure because there isn’t a cure right now but just make advancements in this field because the prognosis is just very poor right now. And like I said, it’s a three-stage palliative operation. And that’s really all they can offer right now besides transplant. So we love to be involved in that. Sadly, we didn’t get to that Stage 2 operation to get to use those stem cells. But still, they were happy to be able to participate with Mayo Clinic in that. We also participated in another Mayo Clinic study with DNA. So my wife and I both took mouth swabs, and they’re trying to find a genetic link to see what is going on here. They haven’t exactly determined the link yet. But you know, there’s got to be something there more than meets the eye. So we’re happy to be involved in that too. Another way that we help is just by giving gift bags to the families that are inpatients at the CDICU. These gift bags include a lot of items like children’s books, newborn socks, newborn onesies, pacifier, stuffed animals, toiletries for mom and dad while they’re staying there inpatient in the hospital. There’s a water bottle, Kleenex, individual Tide packets so you can do your laundry there at the hospital. And we also put a binder in there to keep all your child’s medical information. And that’s one of our favorite parts is including this binder because you’re bombarded every day with so much medical information. And a lot of the times, you just freeze because it’s two steps backward, one step forward constantly. And when it’s with your kid and they’re telling you these diagnosis and stuff, it’s so important to have this medical information with you on paper, in a binder, somewhere where you can access it quickly just because a lot of times, it doesn’t sink in when the doctor is telling you these heavy diagnosis. So that’s one of the things we love most about these gift bags, giving those to the families. And then we also — we do a yearly college scholarship for a high school senior that’s going into their freshman year specifically to someone that has a congenital heart defect. So we’re very happy to be able to do that. And we started that this past year. And we would like to be able to increase it every year. Not only increase the value of the scholarship but as time goes on, we would like it be two scholarships, three scholarships, four scholarships, and just keep it growing. We’re just happy to be able to pay it back, and we’re so thankful that our friends and family has helped support us to be able to give back to others as well.

Tim Ulbrich: And I love what you said earlier, Phillip, you know, taking tragedy and turning it into triumph and really being able to make a difference. I think you have been tangibly — you and your wife, obviously — tangibly have been doing that. So thank you for sharing. For our listeners that are hearing that and saying, “I want to learn more about the Harper Faith Foundation,” or perhaps even give to the foundation, where can they go?

Phillip Beach: They can go to our Facebook page, Harper Faith Foundation. That’s probably the best place to get in touch with us. We have an Amazon link if you’d like to donate. And it has all of the items that we include in these gift bags to the families. So literally things like pacifier, the animals, the socks for the newborn, everything that goes in there you can get and reach out to us, connect with us, see what you can do to get involved and learn more.

Tim Ulbrich: So Harper Faith Foundation Facebook group. And we’ll link to that in the show notes for those that want to go onto the website when we publish this episode. You know, the other thing I’m thinking about here, Phil, is I sense many of the YFP community members have a desire to start a nonprofit for a variety of reasons and may look at that and say, “Well, that’s a really daunting, overwhelming task to start a 501c3.” So you mentioned your wife working with LegalZoom are really taking the lead on that process. Talk to us a little bit more — while I know you didn’t do it directly — about the intensity of doing that and hopefully an encouragement to others that, you know, it’s not something that can’t be overcome, can’t be done.

Phillip Beach: Yeah, definitely. So she — like I said, she did the whole process herself. She did all of the research and figured out LegalZoom was the route that we wanted to take. There’s a bunch of questions that you have to answer, of course, to get involved. And they basically assign you a legal team, they set it all up, and it’s a fairly straightforward process once you get it going. I would compare it to TurboTax and filing your taxes. They kind of pinpoint you questions to answer and lead you down the path, and it’s pretty simple as far as that goes.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Awesome. So shifting to your financial plan for a couple moments here as we wrap up, before we had the interview, you had mentioned that you and your wife are interested or moving on the path towards Financial Independence Retire Early, the FIRE movement. We have previous episodes that we’ll link to in the show notes where we’ve talked about this. So tell me more about the motivation. Why is FIRE an area that you and your wife are interested in and pursuing?

Phillip Beach: So I like FIRE for a variety of reasons. But I guess the main thing is having more time and freedom to do what you want and spend that time with your family. Obviously it’s a long-term goal for us. My wife is still in school right now, so that is our focus right now is getting her through school and letting her accomplish her dreams, becoming a nurse and going to nurse practitioner, getting her doctorate. That’s our focus right now. But the opportunity to spend more time with your family, that’s really what we’re striving for.

Tim Ulbrich: Love the clarity of the why there. And typically, you know, student loans are the biggest barrier to people being able to achieve financial independence because you need to obviously be saving aggressively, and student loan payments, you and I both know, can be really big at times. So for your student loan situation, as I understand it, you were on a Public Service Loan Forgiveness Track working for a not-for-profit hospital but then switching to a for-profit hospital that that path changed a little bit. So talk to us about your current student loan repayment strategy.

Phillip Beach: Right, so I was on the PSLF with the nonprofit and I changed to this DOP role, and now it’s a for-profit hospital. But so still on the same loan forgiveness path, but now it’s including the tax bomb, basically, and a little bit longer of a plan. And that’s our plan for right now. And you know, with this whole pandemic and things changing daily, who knows what’s going to happen in the future? But right now, that’s what we’re doing.

Tim Ulbrich: Well right now, you’re in a pretty sweet spot. You know, we were talking before the show that obviously with the passage of the CARES Act, for somebody such as yourself that’s pursuing non-PSLF or even those that are pursuing PSLF, essentially you’re going to get six months worth of credits but have a $0 payment, 0% interest, essentially for six months, end of September. TBD after that. So at least for the foreseeable future, it’s a good place, good place to be in. Couple questions I have for you about the non-PSLF track. First one would be we often don’t talk with folks about how they’re thinking about or saving for the tax bomb. So for a moment, let me just explain for those listening that may not be familiar in that if somebody’s pursuing non-Public Service Loan Forgiveness inside the federal system, instead of 10 years with PSLF and that being tax-free forgiveness, with non-PSLF, as you mentioned, it’s longer and it’s not tax-free forgiveness. So for example, if you have $100,000 at the point of applying for forgiveness after 20 or 25 years, depending on your plan, that essentially gets treated like income that year, and you have to be preparing for the “tax bomb” that will be coming, which could be sizable, depending on one’s student loan amount and the amount that’s forgiven. So the question often comes then, you know, how do you plan for it? Do you worry about it now? Do you worry about it later? Where do you put those monies? So how are, Phillip, thinking through the preparation of the tax bomb?

Phillip Beach: So I guess there’s a lot of strategy I’ve read about online, and I’m thankful for so much content and resources from the YFP community and there’s some other physician bloggers for finances. And I guess right now, it’s a little bit of both, worrying about it now and in the future. And hopefully during this whole time period, you can set aside funds to a separate account and that is basically your tax bomb fund is how I’m thinking about it. And so when that time comes, you’re ready for that. Or hopefully it’s even a larger amount than that, and if the whole forgiveness thing washes out and you’re not — and that’s not a possibility, you have enough in that side fund to just completely pay it off. So that is kind of my long-term goal there.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. And while you’re in this situation that’s somewhat unique of six qualifying payments and you have to make a payment and if I remember correctly, you said your monthly payment was just shy of about $1,000 per month. So talk us through like what’s your strategy during this unique COVID-19 situation where you don’t have to make a payment? How are you thinking about utilizing those resources that would otherwise go towards student loans?

Phillip Beach: Well, you know, it’s such a fluid thing. But I’m waiting to get more information. So again, I’m thankful for your guys’ website putting out almost daily information bits on that. But we will probably hammer off some of the remaining debt that we have just a little bit left on my wife’s car. You know, that’s very tempting to go ahead and take care of. That’s probably our biggest interest rate right now. So that might be what it goes to. If I don’t have to make student loan payments for the next six months, that’s probably what will happen.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, it’s a time where you can be a little bit more opportunistic, right? Especially if you’ve got other parts of the plan tidied up in terms of emergency fund, credit card debt. I think it’s an opportunity to be opportunistic with those funds that would have otherwise gone towards student loans. So long-term, Phillip, there’s an interest, passion perhaps, to open up your own gym. So tell us more about that.

Phillip Beach: I’ve always been interested in maybe having my own small business one day. And I’ve been always been interested in nutrition and exercise. So that just seems like a no-brainer to me. And actually, my brother and I have always had this dream I feel like of just opening up our own gym and making that a reality one day. And the whole thought of doing something that you really love every day. And not only that, but it’s a place to help people. I can’t help but think of how much chronic illness we deal with here in America, and it’s just — it’s the cure for it basically is how I see it. Moving more, exercising more, can — it’s just the cure.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and it reminds me of the episode we had with TJ Allen, who is a owner of a couple different gyms as well as an independent pharmacy owner, previously on the show. Just another example of kind of a passion for fitness, entrepreneurial type of mindset, and certainly strategic when it comes to his financial plan. So Phillip, thank you so much. I mean, this has been a great interview, certainly has inspired and I’m confident will do the same for our audience. I appreciate your willingness to come on, record this very early, 6 a.m. your time here this morning when we hit record and certainly willing for your — appreciate your willingness to share the journey that you’ve had with Harper Faith, obviously you and your wife, and more about the Harper Faith Foundation. So thank you so much.

Phillip Beach: Well thank you for having me on. And again, I hope this message can bring some positivity to at least one person and inspire them to keep going and get through those trials in their life. So again, thank you for having me on and thank you to all of our frontline healthcare workers too, the nursing staff, retail pharmacists, everyone out there that’s out there on the frontlines dealing with this pandemic. So just want to give a shoutout to you guys too.

Tim Ulbrich: Thank you, Phillip.

Phillip Beach: Thank you, Tim.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 146: COVID-19: Financial Considerations


COVID-19: Financial Considerations

Things are changing on a daily basis secondary to COVID-19. In these unprecedented times, there are a lot of financial concerns people are likely having. On this episode sponsored by APhA, Tim Baker, CFP® answers questions about investing, the uncertainty of work and student loans.

Summary

This podcast is from the APhA and YFP webinar recorded on March 31, 2020. In the past couple of weeks, so much has changed as a result of COVID-19. Between the stock market being down, unemployment rising, the CARES Act and rapid changes with federal student loans, it’s likely that you have a lot of questions regarding your finances.

During this discussion, Tim Baker, CFP® answers the questions everyone has at the top of their mind and focuses on the topics of investments, uncertainty of work and student loans. He also dives into the CARES Act and the levers you can pull if you’re facing financial hardship due to unemployment or a reduction in hours.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Well, good evening and welcome to this webinar. My name is Tim Ulbrich from the team over at Your Financial Pharmacist, and I’m excited to also have joining me my partner in crime and Certified Financial Planner Tim Baker as we’re going to talk about a big-time topic right now, which is financial considerations and COVID-19. So thank you so much for taking time out of your schedule to be here tonight. Thank you for those that during the registration process, you submitted questions and concerns that you have. That really helped us shape how we’ll spend our time this evening. And we’re also going to have time to take your questions throughout the evening as well. So thank you again. And first and foremost, before we jump in to individual topics, I know many listening or perhaps those that couldn’t be here tonight that will watch the replay are on the frontlines of this, putting themselves at risk and obviously stress that comes along with that and carrying that risk back home. So thank you so much for the work that you’re doing for the patients that you’re serving. And we certainly appreciate that effort.

So so many financial issues that are swirling around a time like this. And we’re going to try to hit some of the major ones, certainly not all of them knowing there’s so much changing so quickly, literally some days it seems like by the hour. At least by the day, we have some piece of news that’s coming out as it relates to COVID-19 and something related to the financial plan. If we look at just the past couple weeks as an example, we’ve seen the markets really take a significant hit. As of this morning, the Dow Jones was down roughly 25% from its February peak. And we actually saw that was inching closer to 40% last week before we saw an increase at the end of last week. Unemployment rate predictions are upwards of 30%. We certainly hope that many pharmacists aren’t going to be in that figure, but we’ve already seen a significant rise in unemployment claims in this area. We saw news of the fed cutting interest rates. And in one week, we had three pieces of big news related to student loans. First, the announcement from the Trump administration that we would be freezing interest rates on student loans for 60 days. Then, the announcement that there would be a pause of payments due for a 60-day period. And then of course, with the stimulus package that was passed last Friday, ultimately as we’ll talk about in more detail tonight, six-month window on most federal loans in terms of pausing the payments as well as interest accrual during that time. So certainly big news here in the last couple weeks as it relates to student loans.

So lots of things to talk about, and a brief introduction to the format. Then we’ll jump right in, and I’m going to put Tim Baker on the hot seat and start firing away your questions as we talk about really three big buckets of topics that we saw come through as themes when you all registered for this webinar this evening. One was around investments, you know, what do I do in terms of my investments during an uncertain time period such as this? How does my investing strategy change? So we’ll talk about that in detail. The second around the uncertainty of work and what this time period means in terms of employment and changes and we know some of you may be dealing with this more for others. And how does that impact the financial plan? And what could you be doing during this time of uncertainty? And then last of course would be student loans. And as I mentioned earlier, there’s a lot, a lot to talk about here. So in terms of the format, what we’re going to do is I have gathered some questions in advance, and I’m going to fire away at Tim Baker in each one of these three areas: investments, work uncertainty, and student loans. And then we’ll pause at the end of each of those sections to answer some of your questions. We may not get to all of them, but we’ll try to get to as many as we possibly can this evening. So if you have a question as you’re hearing some of the discussion this evening, please go ahead and submit that in the chat, and then I’m going to ask Drew from APhA, who’s on the call this evening, to help us field those questions and we’ll take a couple breaks throughout.

I do want to thank before we get started as well the American Pharmacists Association for the continued partnership that we have with Your Financial Pharmacist to provide financial education resources that are exclusive to APhA members. So this is one example, but we’ve been doing webinars often and live events. We have discounts on our products and services, including comprehensive financial planning, which you can learn more about at YFPPlanning.com. So to check out a lot of the resources that we’ve done with APhA, you can go to pharmacists.com/YFP and get more information about that partnership and even go back and watch some of the webinars that we’ve done over the past couple years.

Alright, Tim Baker, officially welcome. That was a long introduction, but welcome.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And I know this is a chaotic time, so thank you for taking time out of your schedule to do this.

Tim Baker: Yeah, of course. Happy to be here.

Tim Ulbrich: So we know that many of your clients at Your Financial Pharmacist certainly are having a lot of questions. So many of these you probably already have gotten, but we’re going to go through, as I mentioned, each of these in more detail in three different buckets. So let’s start with investments. And I think probably the most common question that we’re seeing in a time period such as this, which is really similar — while the situation is different — similar market drops to what we saw in 2008 is what should I be doing as I think about my account being down? So the question here is my accounts are down 25% — so assuming your retirement accounts — from mid-February. How should my investing strategy change during this uncertain time where it appears there’s no end in sight to this pandemic and the havoc that it’s wreaking? So talk to us about investment strategy broadly during a time period like this.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so — again, if people have heard me answer these questions, I’m going to start off with the worst answer ever. It’s going to depend. So a lot of our listeners are 20-something, 30-something, 40-something year-olds. And if your portfolio goes down now and you’re planning to retire when you’re 50, 60, 70, it doesn’t matter that much. Now, I don’t want to be facetious in saying that because it’s still painful when you look at hey, I had $200,000 in my portfolio and now I have $160,000 or something to that effect. That’s never fun, and we as human, those losses that we feel, the loss aversion really takes hold of us and it’s not fun. But the fact of the matter is that in most cases, these types of corrections, which last time was a subprime mortgage crisis that was created by kind of poor lending practices, this is a pandemic. I thought we were going to have kind of a downturn in the market due to an election. But this is kind of something that’s come out of nowhere, in essence, that’s really affected the market. And typically, these types of things, they last in the long run three years, three and a half years. So again, if you’re — I’m 37. I’ll use my example. If I’m going to work until I’m 67, that’s 30 years. I’m probably not going to even remember this unless I think about all of the Netflix I watched or the Zoom conferences that I had with my family, the games that we played. So now, the equation is a little bit different if you are kind of further along and closer to retirement. So probably some of the worst years to take a recession or to take a hit in your portfolio is right as you’re about to retire. So you know, 2, 3, 4, 5 years out. And the reason for that is when you start withdrawing on your portfolio in retirement, now you’re taking principal out, and you have to make up those gains that much more. So going through the eye of the storm in retirement is kind of like the couple years out to a couple years into retirement, which is when you probably want to be the most conservative. So depending on what side of the coin you’re on, that’s going to be a big part of it. Now, I was talking with a counterpart that said, hey, a bunch of his clients are reaching out and they’re like, how am I doing? And most of his clients are OK because he’s built out basically a bond ladder to get them through recession-like downturns in the market. So they’re basically priming that and maybe a little bit too much for this particular talk, but it really depends on where you’re at. So I would say as a general principle, a general rule of thumb with investments, you typically want to do the opposite of how you feel. So you know, when the subprime mortgage crisis was going on or right before the subprime mortgage crisis, people were taking out money from everywhere to buy real estate. When the dot-com crisis happened, right at the peak of that, people were taking out second mortgages on their house to buy cats.com. So in that case, we know that the markets probably inflated, and we want to be a little bit more conservative. I’m not saying do anything vastly different, but in the downturn, you know, when we see that slight, that drawdown, we typically want to take our investment ball and go home. So that’s what I tell my clients is that you don’t want to take your investment ball and go home. You actually want to do the opposite. You want to keep playing. If you can, you want to play some more, which means that if you are in a good cash position, get money to the market. Now, I often — and I said this last time we talked about this — sometimes I think financial advisors or we as humans, we rationalize away the loss and we’ll say, oh, it’s a great time to buy. It is kind of because when Trump was elected last time, I’m like, oh, the market, it’s overpriced, we’re going to see a correction, not a great time to buy. And that’s kind of the levels we’re at now. So it’s relative, right? But to me, the rule of thumb here is typically the more that you do, the worse. The more tinkering, the more you try to like outfool, outplay the market, it’s not going to work. You know, best rule of thumb is if you’re kind of in this situation where you’re in this accumulation phase, if you can invest more, invest more. If you can be a little bit more aggressive, be a little bit more aggressive. I often say that if you’re kind of in your 20s, 30s and 40s, you probably shouldn’t have any bonds in your portfolio at all. That’s my belief just because basically they’re a drag on your investments. When you get closer to retirement and there’s more safety in principal, then you want to put bonds in there and start really building out kind of that retirement paycheck, that bond ladder. So lots of words, lot of different ways to look at that. At the end of the day, this too shall pass. Markets will go up, it’s part of the general cycle of things. We’re basically being forced into this one a little bit more because of the pandemic, but we were also on an 11-year bull market, a positive market, really since the last downturn. So yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great stuff. And Tim, this really has been a reminder for me in a couple areas. It’s something we preach and teach, but when it hits you directly, it’s a gut check to say, do I really believe in what I preach and teach? And you know, we talk about volatility and the irrationality of the markets and who can predict it, what a great example this has been. I mean, nobody can say they — now, some people might say I saw a bubble and it was eventually going to pop, yadda yadda yadda ya, but nobody predicted COVID-19 specifically. Maybe Bill Gates. But nobody predicted the impact that that would have at this time period and obviously the unemployment, all the impacts we’ve had. But also I think it’s just been a good reminder of some of the investing principles and strategies that I know I’m highly leveraged in stocks, you see a significant drop, I log into my accounts, I want to take action. I know I shouldn’t take action, so for me, this has also been a really good reminder of the value of having a coach in your corner, on your team, in a time period like this to really help you take a step back and look at the whole plan and to really go back and think, what’s the goal? What are we trying to do? What’s the timeline? And a period like this quickly becomes very emotional, not objective, and I think having somebody else that can really help you navigate a difficult time like this is a great reminder.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and my overall belief — I have a few of them — but my overall belief for investments is that investments should be as boring and budgeting. It should be as boring as paying off the debt. It should not be sexy, it shouldn’t be exciting. I think oftentimes when we make it that, that’s where we get into trouble because we’re typically going into investments that maybe cost too much. So when you think about like, oh, this is a smart beta fund, it’s going to cost the investor a lot of money. You know, even I am like, oh man, maybe I should buy this stock because it’s trading really low. And the example I gave the last time we talked about this is you know, when we had corrections in the ‘80s and ‘90s, my first employer out of the Army was Sears. Sears was this giant company that was never going to go away, it was retail supreme, kind of like the Amazon of today. It’s trading at like $.31 a share right now because they just were — so everyone thinks well maybe Amazon — I don’t think Amazon shares are down — but maybe that other, that Walmart or that other stock. So you start twisting your mustache to say hey, maybe I can outsmart the market, maybe this is a great time to buy. And my belief — and again, I do this for a living — is I just become overwhelmingly humbled again and again by that. So you can — I think it’s OK, my personal opinion, to take a small percent, 5-10%, and speculate on stocks. I don’t personally do it anymore because I, again, I’m tired of being humbled by the market. I like to buy the market. It treats you right over the long term and just rebalance it over time. So one of the things that I think you can do if you’re up for it is that if you’re not in something like a target date fund, you know, when I’m reviewing — I reviewed a client’s patient, actually one of the clients are about to be forgiven for PSLF. They’re two months away. Yeah, one of the things that we looked at their TSP and the spouse’s 401k, very out of balance in terms of like their equity to fixed income ratio. So one of the things we were going to go do — and we can do this for them with some of the tools that we have — is we basically rebalance that back because right now their portfolio is more conservative than what they signed up because equities are depressed and as a result, the fixed income makes up a bigger percentage. So we’re basically going to rebalance those out. Now, my counsel to them is get rid of the bonds in general. They’re about my age, a little bit older. But they’re kind of in a 90-10 stocks to bonds split. So that’s maybe one thing that you can do to tinker or change. And in reality, you should do that once or twice per year. And I think that’s good.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think that’s a good reminder. I haven’t seen a lot of discussion on in this area of investing is making sure you’re looking at your distributions and rebalancing appropriately as a time period like this can certainly throw things off. So to your comment, you alluded to this, and I’d like to talk more about this. Question here is for several people that are listening that may be in a position to invest, you know, they might look at a time like this and say, “OK, is this a time I should be doubling down? Should I do it? Should I wait? Should I hold that money for other uses, depending on a certain time? Where do I begin to think about how to invest that money?” So talk us through more of the opportunistic side of if I have money to invest, is this a period where I want to make that move?

Tim Baker: Yeah. And again, it depends, Tim, again. I’ll say that again and again. You know, if we look at your balance sheet and you have that emergency fund that’s fully plussed up, your consumer debt is in line so you’re not really — you don’t have any credit card debt or you’re not paying that couch off that you bought a year ago when you moved into your house, you know, and you feel pretty secure, as secure as you can be, now might be a good opportunity to start increasing that 401k contribution, that 403b contribution. If you haven’t dabbled in IRAs, you can open up IRAs to basically supplement that. But you know, right now, I think because of what we’re seeing, my inclination for — in a lot of ways is to kind of sit on the cash and put it in a high-yield account, get your 1.5% interest rate now and call it a day. But you know, me personally, I have shoveled some money into the IRAs as I can, just to get that money into the market and working. But I also feel fairly confident in kind of cash position and where we’re at. So yeah, I think it depends on a lot of factors like if you’re a one-income, two-income household and just some of those other things. Now, we’ll talk about this in a second, but one of the big things is that between now — really, March 13 to end of September, for federal loans, $0 payments, 0% interest, so one of the big things — and we talk about this on the podcast all the time, if you guys are not familiar with YFP podcast, check us out. But one of the things we talk about is really acting and planning with intent. So one of the things I’m talking about with clients is hey, you have this $800 per month federal loan payment for your Pay As You Earn. Now that’s going away, and if you’re going for a forgiveness play, you know, PSLF, that still counts. The $0 payment still counts for September, all the way up until September. So what can we do with that $800? And it might be to get the emergency fund further plussed up. It could be to pay off a car, credit card debt. It could be to invest. And I think all of those things are on the table. But I think ultimately, what we don’t want to do is just say,”Oh, sweet, there’s an extra $800 into the pot.” We as humans, we see a copious resource and consume it, whether it’s time or money. So really be intentional and call out, OK, this $800 is going to go right into my Ally emergency fund — I like Ally — or some other emergency fund that you have. Or it’s going to go, I’m going to schedule that payment to go right into my IRA I can contribute for 2019 all the way up until July of this year. So lots of different kind of ways to look at it.

Tim Ulbrich: So for those that are looking to invest and have extra money that they want to then utilize this time period to implement that strategy, I would reference you back, all the way back, to November 2018, which seems forever ago, on the podcast. Episodes 072, 073, 074, 075 and 076, we did a month-long series all about investing, including the priority of investing and commonly asked questions around investing. And I think that material would be helpful to make sure you’re strategically making those decisions as you invest those funds. Tim, other question here — we’ll round out this section on investing as we transition to some of the uncertainty around work, and I’d remind people if they have questions about investing, please submit them now — is the time of rainy day fund emergency savings. You know, we normally preach and teach 3-6 months, depends on individual factors, if you have one income, two incomes, how comfortable, are you not with the amount of funds that are available, what are the priorities you’re trying to achieve? So my question here, is this a time period you look at — and you might have alluded to this a little bit already — where you say, “Maybe there is a time period where somebody who normally would be 3, maybe it should look more like 6?” Or somebody who’s normally at 6 months, this should be larger than 6 months. How do you typically advise clients on the rainy day fund during a time period like this?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean, a lot of those I think have been set by like the Certified Planning Board and they’ve gone through multiple iterations of downturns in the market and things like that. You know, the danger of having more than 6 months in cash is that your cash position is too much and that you should really have some of that money into the market. Now again, that gets put to the test when you’re out of work and you can’t find employment or that type of thing. So I don’t think systemically, anything really changes. But you know, I look at my own — one of the things that I, we get stuck on sometimes is, you know, I meet with a client and I say, “Hey, your emergency fund needs to be $20,000.” And then you know, they maybe move and buy a new house, maybe they have a kid and like we don’t go back and kind of refresh that.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: And that needs to be refreshed. So you know, basically what I do from the outset is I say, “Hey, this is what a good emergency fund is. This is where I would put it.” And then we build the savings around that. So I’m a big proponent of having like savings built out for things that are kind of more in line with your goals. So the emergency fund anchors that and then we have kind of secondary and tertiary savings goals. So I don’t think it really changes anything systemically, but I also like one of my bias is that for me, like if I was out of a job like this, like I would figure it out. And I don’t care what I have to do, like I would hustle. And part of that’s kind of just the entrepreneur coming out in me. Not everyone has that, you know? So if you’re more conservative with kind of going out and trying to find income streams, which sometimes pharmacists are, then maybe you do for this period of time try to shuttle away more and then when basically things come to more normalcy, then you kind of get back to that 3-6 months. So I think if you have the cash and you can plus up your account a little bit more, that makes sense. But I think as we go, a lot of the questions people are asking is like, how is this going to change society? How is this going to change how we interact with people and our spending habits and things like that? I don’t know if it really will. Maybe it does. I kind of look back at like 9/11, and you know, now we are however many years later, and it’s like ugh, I have to take my shoes off when I fly in an airplane.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: And you know, I was my freshman year at West Point when that happened. And obviously that was a big, big thing in my life just like it was in everyone’s life. But I think that over time, things erode, we forget, and I think there will be a time when we can go to the movies and not feel scared about getting sick or whatever that is. And I think the same is true with our spending, how we save, and all that kind of stuff.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think this is a good time as we’re wrapping up this section talking about rainy day funds, you know, one of the things that I always mention, especially when you have two people that are working through a financial plan together, is I don’t think this is the place to push somebody else.

Tim Baker: No, yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So really making sure you are having an honest conversation about during uncertainty like this, sometimes it’s not rational, what makes you comfortable? And obviously there has to be a reasonable balance of that as you’re trying to achieve other goals and do other things. You know, as you mentioned, you don’t want to have too much in the cash position. But if you’re splitting hairs between 4 and 5 months and somebody is more comfortable with 5 months or 6 months, like this is the place to defer, you know, as you look at making sure that both spouses, both individuals that are working on this together are comfortable with that. So Drew, at this point, as we wrap up this investing section and talk about COVID-19 and the financial implications as it relates to investing, I want to pause here and address any questions that have come in specific to investing as we move on to the next topic about work uncertainty.

Drew: Sure, thanks, Tim. So we’ll start with the first question here. For those at home who are kind of relying on financial planners to really manage their investments and maybe they’re looking to gain more knowledge and education around this topic, where might you guys recommend that they start to get that education and really start to learn about investing on their own?

Tim Ulbrich: Great question. Tim Baker, do you want to start and then I’ll chime in?

Tim Baker: I mean, I’m biased. I think right here, right? Like this is a good spot. What I tell clients when we go through any part of the financial plan, whether it’s the fundamentals: insurance and benefits, retirement investment, estate, tax credits, negotiation, whatever that is, just to kind of name a few parts of the plans that we cover, I want to educate clients in a way that it’s enough to make you dangerous but not enough to bore you to death. So we probably could release — I mean, you know, what Tim and Tim wrote, “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” is another great tool, resource, to — if you’re a reader, you know, I can probably name off a bunch on my kind of read list that would go onto the Mount Rushmore of investment books to read: “Index Revolution” is one. I don’t know, Tim, what am I missing here?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great recommendations on books. “MONEY Master the Game” is something that I typically recommend as a book.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: They do a nice job some of the complexities of investing in a very easy to understand way. Obviously, I put a plug in for our comprehensive financial planning services that Your Financial Pharmacist specifically designed for pharmacy professionals. And you can learn more about that at YFPPlanning.com. And we have some exclusive benefits to APhA members. Two other things that jump out to me: One, I mentioned the investing series we did on the podcast back in November 2018. Again, Episodes 072-076. So you can download that on Apple podcasts, Spotify, or wherever you get your podcasts each and every week — sounds like a commercial. And then the last thing for APhA members, since we’re here obviously in that, is that we’ve done — you’ve done — previous webinars I believe Investing 101, Investing 102, that are available recorded. And again, you can access those at pharmacists.com/YFP. So I think a whole lot of resources, probably strategically identifying one or two to get started and not getting overwhelmed. But I think even for those that have a financial planner, you know, whether it’s us or somebody else, I think making sure — this is true of any part of the financial plan — making sure you’re educated and up-to-speed yourself I think just leads to a richer conversation and a greater understanding and you’re asking more questions, typically, when you are more knowledgeable about a topic. So you know, I think sometimes there’s a tendency to say, “Oh, I’ve got my investment guy, right? I’ve got somebody that’s doing this for me.” And I think it’s always helpful to have some of the base knowledge yourself as well. Awesome. Drew, what else?

Drew: Awesome. Thanks, Tim. Next question. Is it risky to put money into a savings account where you don’t have close access to the bank? Also, should you have some money not in the bank in case the market crashes?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that’s a good question. So the first question I’m guessing they’re referring to like an online bank perhaps is the way I interpret that versus like a local branch that you can walk through the doors. I mean, I don’t know, Tim Baker, how you feel. I don’t necessarily view online banks such as Ally, CIT Bank, others that are out there that have online savings accounts, to me, I don’t like at that any different than me walking through the doors of a Huntington branch here in Columbus. You know, as long as they’re FDI-insured, obviously you’re looking for competitive product and offering. I feel like from a security standpoint and an offering standpoint, I very much view a physical location similar to an online bank. And obviously you and I have both used Ally extensively and are comfortable with that. What are your thoughts on the cash part of it? This has come up before, I think in our webinar last week about is this a time period where you actually want to have physical cash in hand. What are your thoughts on that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I had a client ask me this, and I’ve been asked this a couple times since this has all been going on. And I can’t see — I have like a strong — you know, I actually had a client talk about it today. You know, it’s like, we’re not Doomsdayers, but should we keep some cash in the house? And I’m like, I don’t know. I feel like the banks, one of the lessons learned from the last crisis, the banks are more robust and stronger than they’ve probably ever been. And at the end of the day, like what the government is trying to do is figure out ways to get money into the hands of the people and really businesses. So I don’t have this overwhelming personal need to have stacks of cash in a safe in my house in Baltimore, Maryland. So you know, and I remember the first time I talked about this with a client, I said, “You know, if there is a run on like ATMs, maybe that could be a thing. But then you could always go to the grocery store and like take out cash when you did.” But the second I said that the last two times, I’ve been to the grocery store. They basically turned that off.

Tim Ulbrich: Turned it off, yep.

Tim Baker: And my thought was like, OK, grocery stores are flush because everyone’s buying toilet paper and everything else. But yeah, so maybe. I think though, it’s like you can do everything electronic these days anyway. So people are like, what if you need cash? I’m like, Venmo or PayPal? They’re like, well my parents are old, they’re older and they haven’t used all that stuff. I don’t know. I just don’t — I personally don’t see it. But again, a lot of this goes back to how you feel. So if it makes you feel better to have $1,000 in the house, then do it. I don’t think there’s anything terribly wrong with it. I feel like growing up, my mom would hide money around the house. I don’t know why, it was just one of her things, you know, just like little nest eggs. So I don’t know.

Tim Ulbrich: I agree with you. And I think unfortunately, right now since we’re all pretty much quarantined for the most part is if I had $1,000 in cash, I ain’t really going anywhere where I can spend that cash right now. You know, most of it at least what we’re doing from grocery and other standpoint, you know, we’re pre-ordering and picking it up and that kind of thing. So good question, thought, but I echo your comments and feelings. I think you’ve also got to ask yourself, how does this make you feel? And how does that sway your decisions?

Tim Baker: Yeah, and another thing I talk to clients about is like, I’ll say something to the effect of like outside the Zombie Apocalypse, the market’s going to go up. And if we have the Zombie Apocalypse, we have such bigger problems than our investment portfolio. And I think the same is true, it’s like if all of a sudden the banks collapse and we can’t get cash, like the cash might be worthless, you know? So there might be more systemic things to worry about. So probably not the right kind of tone of the conversation, but I just, yeah, I think you’re OK with trusting the banks.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and if that happens, you’re not making student loan payments.

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: A lot of things aren’t getting paid.

Tim Baker: Right, I agree.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s a depressing thought. So Drew, how about one more before we keep the ball rolling and move onto the next section? And then we can also hold some time at the end.

Drew: Sure. Absolutely. And I just wanted to mention, guys, I know we have a lot of questions coming in, a lot of questions around student loan repayment, and so we do have a couple more topics, one of those being student loan repayment. So we will do our best to get to those questions. So I think we’ll just finish up with a comment. We had a comment from someone come in, they said they’re a member of the Pharmacist Stock Club. It’s a great local opportunity for meeting, learning, and idea sharing. So if you’re interested, try to find and join a local club. So I just wanted to follow up to the question we had earlier about kind of getting started in investing and learning about those options. So I thought that was a good comment to add.

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: For sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Very cool. I love the passion for learning. And whoever submitted that comment, I’d love to hear more from you about what that looks like and how you do it and perhaps we can share with others that may be looking to start something in their own community or even in these times, start something virtually. So let’s transition to the next area, which I would say led the way in those that registered. When we asked the question, you know, what are you most concerned with your financial plan as it relates to COVID-19, there was this bucket around uncertainty of work. And we know certain situations — I would say they’re not very frequent right now from what we can gather — but we know there’s certain situations where folks have reduced hours because of lower senses at the hospital as they’re waiting for the surges to happen into the future. You know, we do know that many might be impacted by whether it’s not necessarily their own cut hours, it could be a spouse, a family member that is being impacted, or somebody that has a business or a side hustle, I think about things like Airbnb income, or it could be somebody that even gets sick with COVID and is unable to work for a period of time. So you know, I think this is an important topic that we spend a little bit of time in. And I want to kick off the discussion here, Tim Baker, for those that are listening and are concerned about either current situations of reduced hours or that that may come in the future or their job is impacted in one way or another, what are some things that they can be thinking about with their financial plan to prepare for that situation? Big question, I know.
Tim Baker: Yeah, so there’s so many different facets to this point. So like, you know, one of the things and really the ink is still drying, so maybe I’ll talk more about the CARES Act that President Trump signed into law last Friday. So real quick, the CARES Act stands for the Coronavirus Aid Relief and Economic Securities Act that was passed by the Senate, then the House, then signed into law by Trump last Friday. We’re still basically reading and deciphering like what is actually included in here and how it’s all going to work. But really, it’s a $2 trillion emergency fiscal stimulus package, which is aimed to ease the effects of kind of the economic damage that that this is really causing. This is the largest economic stimulus package in U.S. history, actually it’s more like $6 trillion when you factor in like loan provisions and guarantees that the U.S. government is making. A good part of this, about half a trillion, $500 billion, is for stimulus checks, could be more for — $500 billion for severely damaged industries, $400 for wages and payroll tax relief and on and on. So I think the biggest thing that I would probably do if I was concerned or if I was furloughed or something like that is actually file for unemployment. So we did see a big spike, probably the largest spike I think ever, 3.3 million people filed for unemployment between March 15 and March 21. That was the biggest I think spike in history. But a lot of people, they’re like, ah, there’s maybe a stigma side. It doesn’t matter. At the end of the day, we’ve got to pay the bills. You pay into it as a taxpayer, so this is a benefit for the purposes of that is to actually file for unemployment. And what the CARES Act does is actually has expanded that in terms of what you potentially get from an unemployment perspective. Another thing to do is actually take stock, look at your balance sheet. So obviously we’ve been talking about the power of the emergency fund and being able to look at OK, what is your burn rate? How many months can you basically get by without any income? And then if we supplement this with some of the other incomes out there, how do we do this? But one of the big things that you now have access to that you didn’t have access to before were things like your retirement plans, IRAs, 401k’s, 403b’s. You can actually take distributions up to $100,000 in 2020. You have to take the distribution in 2020 from these IRAs and employer-sponsored plans, without penalty. So as long as you’ve been affected by the coronavirus — and this is a very broad interpretation — you either have to be diagnosed, have a spouse or dependent diagnosed, you’ve experienced adverse financial consequences as a result, you’re unable to work because you can’t get daycare, you own your own business and it had to close, very, very broad. You basically are exempt from the 10% penalty. So most people know that once you put money into an IRA, a 401k, once it hits that bucket, for you to get it out, it’s a 10% penalty to get those moneys out. That goes away. A lot of times, you had to withhold if you were taking money out of or rolling over a 401k, you had to withhold 20%. And the reason that they do this is people take that money out, and it’s recognized as income. And then when the tax bill comes due, they’re like, oh, I forgot that I have a $50,000 tax bill or a $20,000 tax bill. The withholding goes away. And you can actually — you can repay this back. So you could say, “Hey, I need this $100,000 today for 2020,” and then over the next three years, you can pay it back or not without penalty. So that’s another thing that you can do. The other thing that they also did is they enhanced 401k. So most 401k’s, 403b’s, have provisions for you to take money and basically for hardships. So they’ve kind of done some broad strokes here. So typically, the maximum that you can take from a 401k was $50,000. Now they doubled that to $100,000.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: Basically, it used to be that you could only take 50% of the vested balance. So if I had a $40,000 401k, I could only take $20,000 of that. Now it’s basically you can take 100% of what’s vested. So if I have $40,000, I could take all $40,000 up to a maximum of $100,000. And then the big thing here is when you take money from the 401k, you typically pay that back as part of your paycheck with an interest payment. All of this, all of those payments will be delayed for at least up to a year. So those assets on your balance sheet, when you’re looking at OK, how do I get through this? You do have some levers to pull. And obviously some of the things that we always talk about is the emergency fund, you could always basically put in your — or take out what you put into a Roth, that comes out without penalty. You know, I think the big thing that I always talk about is diversifying your income streams.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So you know, I think we as Americans, just people, we say, “OK, this is our paycheck,” and we self-cap our income. But especially now, and I often wonder like to me, the things I’m really interested coming out of the coronavirus is what are all the things that we see as problems or we’re just sitting around and like here’s a solution.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: So it could be where a business idea is born out — typically, that takes a lot of ramp-up, so maybe it’s not now. But you know, big things like could you deliver for Amazon? I would do it in a second. I love to drive around, listen to stuff, that would be fine by me. Some people are like nope, don’t want to do that, I want to stay quarantined. But thinking of ways to diversify income is big. And then probably just do a bottom-up approach to your budget. Really look at that. You know, obviously, growing top-line income I think can have far ramifications. But looking at your budget and say, “OK, do I really need” — like my wife and I, we do cleaners once a month. They’re not coming to our house because they don’t want to get infected. So that’s out of the budget. But things like that that you can basically say, OK, is this something that I absolutely need to have? You can wipe out your student loan payment. A lot of banks are forgoing mortgages, so you can contact your bank and say, “Hey, coronavirus, no loan payment for the foreseeable future.” So there’s lots of different things like that that I think are big to kind of get us through this tough period. Tim, did I leave anything else out?

Tim Ulbrich: No, that’s really comprehensive. And I’m glad you talked about all the different levers you can pull. And I’m glad you started with unemployment claims because I think there is a stigma. I know it’s something I would struggle with. But I think we have to remember that this was passed for this specific reason. So if we have somebody on the call tonight who is having a financial hardship, has reduced hours, has lost their job, has been furloughed, whatever be the case, I think starting there — because the way I think about this is of all the things you talked about, in what order am I going to pull the levers, right? So the way I think I would think about this is if I can file for unemployment and because of the CARES Act, we see that there’s some extra provisions there with additional benefits from the state and it’s a longer time period, things like that, but if I can then know what I’m looking at in terms of unemployment and then rework my budget, then I kind of know what else do I need to do. Do I need to pull from the emergency fund? Do I need to put the mortgage payment on pause? I don’t have to worry about the student loan payment. Do I need to pull money from a 401k or a 403b or an IRA? But I think objectively, starting with what can you get in terms of replacing income? And then working backwards and identifying what other moves you can make to help in that. So Tim, talk us through — and you might have mentioned this. I just want to make sure that those are on — those that are on are tracking with me as well. If I were to pull or need to pull let’s say $40,000 from my 401k or 403b, you mentioned that that has to be in this year, 2020. Obviously, those are pre-tax contributions. So is that then I would assume just treated as taxable income this year? Can I spread it out? And how should I also be thinking about the tax implications of that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so one of the kind weird things or odd things about this but actually interesting is that you know, let’s take it the round number of $90,000 as an example. So if you can — say you take $90,000 out of your 401k. Now, you don’t get the 10% penalty, which is awesome. You get that cash immediately. So you don’t have to withhold anything. And then you have the eligibility repaid over three years if you want or not. But basically, you can recognize that income either all the $90,000 that you take out in 2020. So let’s pretend that I’m a service worker, and I make $30,000 this year. And I take $90,000 out. Now, I can basically recognize — so I basically am taxed on the $120,000 for 2020. Or I can basically spread out that adjustment between — or that distribution — across three years. So I could take $30,000 in 2020, $30,000 in 2021 and $30,000 in 2022. Now, this is where working with a savvy tax professional like our Paul Eichenberg might help this. But it’s either one or the other. So you can’t like — it’s either like spread it out evenly for three years, which probably more often than not, that makes the most sense if you can defer it out. Or if it’s a really bad year and you want to basically hey, maybe it’s $40,000 that you need, it makes sense to take it all in 2020 because you know, basically you’re shut down, you’re not making any income. Maybe it makes sense to do that. So it just depends on how you elected to do that. Another point about the unemployment that I will say is, you know, again, I kind of think about it kind of like social security. Like you pay into that over the course of your life. Same thing with unemployment. You pay into that. Some of the things that they did with the CARES Act is that the waiting period goes away. So before, you had to typically wait.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: Basically the federal government will cover the first week of unemployment. There’s a fund called the Pandemic Unemployment Insurance, which is typically if you don’t qualify for anything else, it’s typically for self-employed individuals or contractors. That’s available for you. They’ve actually plussed up — so like the regular state unemployment benefit is increased by $600 per week. Just to give you some context, the average, the typical unemployment check, is $385 per week.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, it was big news.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So it’s now like more than double the bonus on top of that. And you get this — and this was probably one of the big things that tied it up in the Congress.

Tim Ulbrich: Senate.

Tim Baker: The Senate, was because they thought that the benefit was too generous where it would disincentivize people from basically going out and looking for work. But they capped it at basically four months. But the extension of the overall benefits go 13 extra weeks. So again, you know, this is — right now, we’re in a time where like we’re cooped up, you know, maybe we’re feeling a little blue, maybe this half of unemployment, this shouldn’t — this doesn’t define you. This is not part of who you are.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Tim Baker: And even like businesses, we’re going to see businesses that are not going to be able to survive this. And it’s a shame because it’s not something that they necessarily did wrong. It’s just a systemic thing that came along, and I think the government is trying to do whatever they can to basically keep businesses afloat and keep people on payrolls and things like that. But this is not a poor reflection of you and what you’re doing. So I just want to make that point because that’s a real thing for sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Great reminder. And I think this is also a good time to remind you, we talk about things like the CARES Act, and we’ll talk about the student loans here in a moment. Here you’re talking about unemployment and the additional $600 a week benefit and the timeline of that being up to four months. I think this is a good time to remind that you know, some of this may be extended. Time will tell. We don’t know. So what we know right now is what’s been passed. But I think we will continue to keep an eye out for discussions. There’s already discussions of a fourth stimulus type of package that is in the works that I was reading about this morning. So I think stay tuned. And if you’re not already part of the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, I hope you’ll join us as we’re trying to stay as up-to-date as we can on all of this information. So before we jump into student loans, Tim, I thought it would helpful since we talked about unemployment and the CARES Act extensively, let’s talk for a moment about the stimulus checks. Who’s getting them? Who’s not? Timeline? And what can people expect here? Because I think we’re going to have some people listening, many people perhaps, that won’t get these or will get a reduced amount. So I don’t want to spend a ton of time here, and this has probably gotten the most wide press compared to some of the other items. But let’s talk for a moment here before we take some questions and then transition into student loans.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so this is Section 2201, the recovery rebates to individuals. Now, the stats out there is that 90% of taxpayers should receive something. I’m not sure what percent or pharmacists will receive this, but essentially this is a credit against 2020 income taxes. So everyone basically has a starting amount and then it gets reduced based on your AGI, you Adjusted Gross Income. So what we use — so as broad strokes, basically it’s $1,200 for each individual or $2,400 for married couples and then $500 per child essentially under 17. So if they’re 17, they don’t get it. Basically, under 17. The phase-outs for this are basically if you’re married filing jointly, it’s $150,000. And then head of household is $112,500 AGI. And then all other filers is $75,000. So basically, the way that you calculate this is if you’re a single taxpayer and you have one kid, that’s $1,200 plus $500 for the child. So that’s a $1,700 refundable credit. If you’re a married couple with one child, you basically have $2,400 plus $500 is the $2,900. Now, you take that as the starting point and then you look at your AGI. So in that first example, if you made $65,000 as a single individual, then you would get 100% of that $1,700.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: If you made $76,000, which is $1,000 above the threshold, then your benefit would be reduced by I think it’s $50 for every $1,000. So in that case, it would be not $1,700. It would be $1,650.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: So the same thing with the married filing jointly, one kid, $2,400 for the couple, $500 for the child, that’s $2,900. If they made basically $151,000, it would basically be reduced by $50. So $2,850 instead of the $2,900. So you start with basically the family situation, then you apply the income, and then you reduce it as such. So for a lot of pharmacists, you know — and again, so the other caveat to this is they’re going to look at the last tax return on file. So if you are not a procrastinator or you filed your taxes early, good for you. They’re going to look at your 2019 return. If you haven’t filed your taxes or you’re like, hey, extension, more time to use, then they’re going to look at 2018. Now, at the end of the day, it will be basically be chewed up on the 2020 tax return. So they’re not going to claw anything back. So let’s pretend that your 2018-2019 income is lower than what it is today, you still get that rebate and they’re not going to claw that back. But let’s pretend that your 2018-2019 income is higher and you get furloughed, you might not get it today. And I would estimate checks will start coming — checks are deposited and will start coming in May. You might get it today, but you could get it when you file your 2020 taxes. Now, does that help you? No. It doesn’t necessarily help you today. But the idea is that in future tax returns, you’ll be indemnified essentially to that, to what you’re — so here’s an example. I’m not going to file my 2019 taxes anytime soon because of a lot of the changes that I had in my household, the business, that type of thing. So our son Liam was born last year. So he’s — to the IRS, he doesn’t really exist right now. So when we go to file for 2020, I expect a $500 credit for him.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: So that’s an example. Now, there are some maybe thoughts about the ethics of this in terms of like, hey, should I file my 2019 because it will give me a better credit? The answer is yes. You should. Or should I wait to file? The answer is yes. That’s just good financial planning, it’s good sense. At the end of the day, this is tax money that they’re basically returning to you. So to me, you know, regardless of where you’re at, whether you are in a position where income is fine and stable, we don’t know that in the future. So to me is this is the system that’s there. It’s just like with taxes, what we say is we want to pay the least amount of taxes humanly possible. That’s legally. That’s legally possible. So we’re not going to pay more than that. So the same thing is that if you can get a better benefit, then you should go for that for sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we’re talking about legal tax strategies. So let’s be very clear on that.

Tim Baker: Exactly.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s an important point. So Tim Baker, when you’re throwing around terms like clawback, you’re not using pharmacy lingo like PBM clawbacks and other things.

Tim Baker: Yeah, sorry.

Tim Ulbrich: There will be no clawbacks here though, just to be clear.

Tim Baker: No clawbacks.

Tim Ulbrich: For those who are used to clawbacks. So Drew, let’s stop here and take a couple questions related to work uncertainty before we move onto student loans.

Drew: Sure, Tim. First question, will this Act allow for small business owners to file for unemployment when they typically would not qualify?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so that — exactly right. So typically as a small business owner, you don’t get into that party. But the Pandemic fund that I mentioned is typically going to be for those small business owners, those contractors, that wouldn’t otherwise qualify. So that’s the fund that they’re probably going to basically dip into. It’s called the Pandemic Unemployment Insurance program. It’s a federal program. And that’s, to me, that’s where I would definitely go.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I was thinking today, Tim Baker, about all of the people that — we talk about on the podcast all the time about side hustling, you know, whether it’s Airbnb, Rover, the list goes on and on. And how many of those are being impacted in a time like this? So it’s certainly something to consider. What else, Drew?

Drew: Thanks, guys. Another interesting question from an independent pharmacy owner. Do you guys have more insight into any assistance that may come in the future? For example, if their business is doing well right now, they’re showing an increase in revenue over the last few weeks. However, they could foresee a slump in the coming months, for example, if they’ve had patients who filled refills early or for 90 days. So therefore, they may need assistance in the future. What do you guys think about that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so actually, one of the changes in the bill — so there are some healthcare-related rules, and I’ll run through those really quickly. So there’s definition of medical expenses is expanded, specifically for HSAs and FSAs. So a lot of eligible medical expenses will now include over-the-counter meds. So that’s a big one. But one of the things that they talked about too is Part D recipients can request up to a 90-day supply. And it’s just a matter of kind of limiting seniors from basically having to go out and those type of things. Telehealth is another big thing that’s been temporary covered by HSA-eligible high-deductible plans. So as part of that, though, to go back to the kind of independent side, one of the major parts of this legislation, the CARES Act is the Paycheck Protection Program, which is essentially — it looks like free money in a lot of ways. So if you are a pharmacy owner out there and you’re like, hey, things are OK now but we could be affected — and actually, Tim, I don’t know if you saw this email. But you know, our bank, our business bank, actually sent us kind of an email about this that said, “Hey, you may be eligible. Check this out.”

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: And it basically outlined a lot of the big — so it’s basically, it’s guaranteed by the Small Business Administration and issued by SBA-approved lenders. You’ve got to apply for this type of loan by June 3. And the maximum duration of the loan is 10 years. So this is typically for a business that has less than 500 employees. You do have to basically in good faith certify that the loan is necessary due to uncertainty of current economic conditions caused by the coronavirus. Now that’s again a broad definition there. And I would say like if you are in the toilet paper or the hand sanitizer business, you should not be applying for this because that would be fraud. But the interesting part of this is that the max loan is the lesser of $10 million, or 2.5 times the average monthly payroll costs of the previous year. And the proceeds can be used for payroll, group health insurance premiums, salaries, rent, utilities. And 100% of that could be forgiven if it’s used during the first 8 weeks that you get the loan.

Tim Ulbrich: Which is crazy.

Tim Baker: And you don’t lay off employees. So you have to basically kind of have the same employees, you have to pay them more or less the same amount, but it’s pretty generous. And the rates for small business rates are typically higher. The rates, the maximum that you can be charged is 4%. The discharge debt is nontaxable. And those initial payments are going to be deferred for at least 6 if not 12 months. So I have an independent pharmacy owner that I was talking to earlier this week and he’s like, “Is this for life?” And I’m like, “I think so. But let me read up more about it.” Because potentially, again, it’s one of those things that’s uncertainty about this. And there’s a lot of businesses that you could probably chalk that up to now go apply for these loans, I think it’s a pain in the neck. So it’s something to consider though.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and get your pen ready I think to do the paperwork. But speaking of toilet paper companies, Tim Baker, I saw a toilet paper startup company I was reading about this morning that I thought was interesting. But I think on a serious note — and we actually were having this conversation before we jumped on this evening — I would encourage whoever asked that question or others that might be this would be impacting is to try to really, really intentionally self-assess, even if you’re not, again, at a good faith statement, even if you’re not impacted today, you know, as you look out in the future and trends and how that business will change, could you be heading in that direction where challenges may present themselves, payroll might be an issue. Or if you’re thinking ahead to the business, you know, that changes hiring or how you’re leveraging resources, I think really taking a step back to say, of course you want to be in good faith, but if there’s not impacts that are happening today that are significant, is that something that could be coming in the future if this continues? So Drew, how about one more and then we’ll transition to student loans.

Drew: Sure, guys. So if someone was unemployed before the CARES Act was passed, could they still have the increase to $600 a week?

Tim Ulbrich: I don’t know that question. My gut would assume yes, they would, but I don’t know the answer to that. Do you, Tim?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think yes. And again, part of this is just if you think about the administration of this to say like, you know, when — I’m pretty sure that — well, maybe it depends. I’m not going to say yes or no to that. That might be something we have to look at. So if you were unemployed before this was signed into law, how does that affect your unemployment? Let me try to find some answers to that. If that person could email us at [email protected], I’ll research and get back to you. That’s a good question.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I would like to think — maybe it’s half glass full — I’d like to think that they wouldn’t penalize somebody because of the timing of that.

Tim Baker: But I do know they were making a big deal about the actual date in which he signs. So it could basically be dated. That’s kind of the line, the demarkation.

Tim Ulbrich: That makes sense.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: OK. Alright, let’s move to student loans, probably a lot to discuss here and it sounds like from Drew’s comment earlier, we have a lot of questions. So we talked a little bit about the CARES Act and student loans, but let’s dig in in more detail, Tim. You know, as I mentioned in the introduction, we had a lot of news around student loans, starting with the 60-day interest freeze to the 60-day no payment with the interest freeze and then obviously the big news that came as part of the CARES Act of no payments for six months with no interest that will accrue during that time. And that was really I think the big news on student loans. So talk to us a little bit about that news as well as what that means for people that are pursuing loan forgiveness and then which federal loans are included and what’s not included.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, the big news obviously, like you said, is that for federal student loan payments — so we’re not talking about your private refi’s. And this is really direct loans, so we’re not even really talking about FFEL loans or even Perkins loans or things like that.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s right.

Tim Baker: We’re really talking about the direct loans that are out there. Automatically, you’re going to basically pay 0% interest effective March 13 to September 20 of this year. And then also, payments will be suspended automatically over the course of the time. Now, we’re still talking to clients and people that are saying like, hey, they’re not suspended. Student loan servicers, one, I think part of the — I’ll give them a little bit of grace because I think they’re understaffed right now because of everything that’s going on but also they’re just — they are notoriously poor at answering questions, responding to borrowers and that type of thing. So it could take a little bit of time for them to kind of get everything on board. But I looked at the FedLoan page as one of the big federal loan servicers, and they said if there is any delay, everything will be retroactively counted and things like that. So you know, typically the big ones are FedLoan, Navient, NelNet, Great Lakes, those are all federal loan providers. So required payments are suspended. And you don’t really have to do anything. And probably it’s better if you don’t do anything because I guarantee you if one person calls and they get one direction and then the next, you could call five minutes later and get a completely separate, different direction. So the big takeaway here is that, you know, from a federal student loan perspective, no interest, no payments until basically September 30. So I think the big thing is depending on where you’re at is to kind of look at, OK, as an example, I have an $800 payment. In most cases, you should not be paying that. We should be directing that elsewhere, which could be looking at plussing up the emergency fund a little bit more, paying down consumer debt or other high-interest debt, it could be invested. So be very, very intentional about how you want to direct that payment. Again, typically if we’re not, we see lifestyle creep and things like that. That $800 gets lost in the fold. So we want to make sure that we’re really intentional with that. Another big thing is that involuntarily debt collections will be basically put on hold and suspended. So if we have anybody out there that’s kind of in those dire straits, you’d have a little bit of reprieve there. If you’re in school, if we have students on here, I think the big thing that’s going to be different is basically you’re going to take all of your unsubsidized loans and they’re going to subsidized. So essentially for those months, you’ll basically not accrue any interest, which is a big deal because that bill is basically tacked on daily. I’m trying to think — now for, I mentioned for federal loans or for private loans and FFEL loans, you kind of got cut out of this deal. So this is one of the things that’s very unfortunate because typically the people that are trying to refinance are really trying to take a proactive approach to paying off their loans. So in the decision tree, it’s typically hey, is forgiveness on the table, whether it’s PSLF or non-PSLF. If it’s not, you’re like, “Hey, Tim, not cool. Don’t trust the federal or the forgiveness program,” which I think is a viable program, you then go to comparing your standard payment to a refi. And typically, refi rates have been so much better than what you get coming out of school, so it makes sense to basically shift over from the federal government to the private. Now you’re basically being penalized for taking a more proactive approach to paying off your loans whereas a forgiveness option or forgiveness play is more of a reactive approach, unfortunately. So you can consolidate loans. I think that if you consolidate them down, a FFEL loan, so this is federal loans that aren’t part of this, you can consolidate a FFEL or even a Perkins loan down and potentially get some type of reprieve on that. Typically when you do that, if you are looking at a forgiveness option — actually, you probably want to not look at that unless you can pick out those loans specifically. That can be a big problem. I think those are the main talking points.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, just to reiterate some of the things you mentioned. I think this is huge news, especially for those that may be hearing this for the first, second or even third time I mean, for that matter. No payments on qualifying federal loans until September 30. Again, who knows? This may or may not be extended. Time will tell. No interest that accrues during the interim. And this will count towards loan forgiveness. So for the client you mentioned earlier that has two months left of PSLF, they’re getting a free ride on the last two payments, huh?

Tim Baker: Well, I told her, I was like, I think that you paid your last student loan payment. And she had the biggest smile ever.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. That’s really cool.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So if somebody does make a payment — and I’m grateful for what you said about really taking a step back and being strategic — obviously would then just go toward directly to the principal, right?

Tim Baker: Yes, correct. Now, according to like FedLoan, they would basically figure out a way to like make you hold so you get that full benefit. I have no idea, and I have very little confidence that will actually happen, so I think one of the questions is, how do I know that if my payments count toward PSLF, I would be tracking them because one of the — although I’ve said it time and time again, I think PSLF is a very viable strategy and I think it does have legs despite the kind of national news about it, you can’t argue with the math. But the administration of this is awful, in my opinion. The Department of Education is supposed to be basically providing oversight for FedLoan, and you know, by and large, they bumbled that program. So there’s lots of handholding, there’s lots of uncertainty around it, but at the end of the day, you have to basically cross your t’s and dot your i’s, just make sure that you’re babysitting them, so to speak. So you know, I think running — one of the things you could potentially do is run an NSLDS report, which is just basically the text document that basically shows the birth to the death of the loan. So basically a month-by-month description. So run that kind of now and then run it afterwards and kind of just see where you’re at in terms of your overall PSLF count. I think that’s what I would do.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, this will as we get through this storm and we talk about PSLF in the future, I think this will be another example point just like last year when they added some funding to the program to help make up for some borrowers that ran into issues, especially those first couple years of applying for forgiveness. I think this will be another tick in the column of you know, it looks pretty good for the longevity of PSLF or the grandfathering of borrowers that are currently there. So does this — Tim, my question is, you know, for those that are or were thinking about refinance, does this effectively make refinance a moot point for this six-month period?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean, I guess there could be certain like instances where you can — because I think one of the things that I am kind of concerned about is some of these companies that are offering refi can’t stay solvent because eventually, effectively, you wiped away a lot of their market because of the 0%. So there’s going to be a lot less people jumping from the federal to the private. Now, I guess you could have some people that go from a private to a private refi.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: So it’s like hey, I have this 5%, I can get a 3.25%. That’s a little bit better. But I think it’s like 90% — isn’t it like 90% of loans are federal loans or something else?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we’ve seen that tick up in rates.

Tim Baker: Yeah. Yeah, so the rates — that’s the other thing. Rates have gone up. So and they’ve been yo-yoing. I wouldn’t be surprised if they went back down.

Tim Ulbrich: Agreed.

Tim Baker: So you know, if I could get in, I would probably have to be somewhat through the benefit period. But if I’m 3-4 months in and I can get a rate that’s really, really aggressive, you know, maybe like 2%, I might consider that as an option just to kind of lock that in. But yeah, I mean, I think it really doesn’t make a whole lot of sense to leave that, to leave the federal system. And I think the other thing to kind of note is the federal loans, they are more generous when it comes to like hardships and things like that because they’re backed by the full faith and credit of the U.S. taxpayer where some of these other companies are not. They don’t have that bank account standing behind them. So they can’t be as generous with them. Now, a lot of them have matched a lot of the kind of the forgiveness upon death and disability and they will work with you on a hardship. And I would say if you do have private loans and you can’t make the payments, contact the Earnest, CommonBond, Credible, whoever it is, and say, “What can we do?” And a lot of times, they will work with you. But they’re also, they’re kind of in dire straits as well. So.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And you know, we talk a lot about on the podcast and the blog on the pros and cons of refinance. So I’m going to have to update my slides in the future, you know, something we could have never predicted, but a COVID-19-like situation where you have something like six months of federal loan payments being paused and 0% interest. I could not have ever predicted this happening. So — and just to add on your comment, Tim, before we take questions, I think it’s a really important reminder that we certainly want to extend them some grace in this moment where they’re dealing with a lot as well, but the loan servicing companies — we even have an example today from one of our Certified Financial Planners, Robert Lopez, who was on the phone with them and I think in his words was really after being on hold, was less than helpful in their response. And I think that can happen in terms of incorrect information or they’re overwhelmed. And we’ve heard that before. This is not the first time. So making sure that what you hear is lining up with other things you’ve heard or if you think, you know, that doesn’t right, making sure you’re fact-checking that.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and the thing that he said to me when I talked to him about it was like, yeah, and she was just very, very confident in her answer but completely wrong, which is — that’s the problem because it’s not like the student loans are a black-and-white issue. There’s lots of nuance and intricacies and when you’re calling up someone on such a big thing, we’re talking potentially six figures of debt, you want to walk away like feeling confident that the advice or the counsel that that person on the other line gave you was sound. And more often than not, it’s just not. And it’s not necessarily the fault of the person, it’s just that they’re not trained very well. And that’s a shame because I think we’re seeing — you know, and that’s one of the bad publicity angles is like hey, I was told this and it was completely something different, you know?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So that’s why I think sometimes working with someone to help cross t’s and dot i’s and get you to that finish line is really, really important because there’s just a lot of potential hoops to jump through. And it’s not just — you know, there’s so many different — even like the tax ramifications with student loans, that’s one of the reasons that we started doing taxes at YFP is like I was tired of basically referring people out to professionals that had no idea how to handle the taxes. So I’m like, we have to do it in-house. And that’s what we do.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Great stuff, Tim Baker, as always. So Drew, you had mentioned earlier lots of questions around student loans, so let’s tackle a handful of those.

Drew: Alright. So the first question, would you consider reconsolidating federal loans for a low rate? Or wait until after September? What if this rate is only offered over the next month?

Tim Baker: So I think we’re kind of conflating two issues if I’m using that word correctly. So consolidation or reconsolidation and refinance are completely separate things. So when you consolidate, when you consolidate your loans, you’re basically taking two or more federal loans, so think Direct Plus, Direct Unsubsidized, Direct Stafford Subsidized, and you’re basically shrinking those down into really one or two loans, more than likely two. You have a Direct Consolidation Unsubsidized loan, and a Direct Consolidation Subsidized loan. The reason that you do consolidation is two reasons: One is for convenience. So you guys know as pharmacists, you have a crapton of loans that are pages long. If you look at your credit report, it’s a mess because every basically disbursement is a record in your credit report. So you do it kind of for ease of use, for convenience. The second reason that you do it is to kind of solve the square peg, round hole. So like we mentioned, some of those FFEL loans and some of those other loans that are out there that a little bit older, they don’t qualify for some of those income-driven plans that are out there that then allow you to be forgiven, to get into some of the forgiveness programs. So it’s basically consolidate those down and then get into those IBR, ICR, PAYE or in a Revised Pay As You Earn. Now, the key here is that you’re just taking a weighted balance in interest rate. So you’re not getting any better terms or deals or anything like that. So if you had, you know, 6% and 5% and 4%, they’d just weight those together and now your new rate is 5.4% as an example. So when you — so that’s consolidation. When you refinance, you’re basically saying, deuces, federal government. Thanks for lending me the money, but I’m going to take my income, my credit score, my payment history, and I’m going to go out to the Credibles of the world, some of these other companies, and I’m going to try to find a better deal, a better terms for myself. So you know, I use kind of 6% as the line of demarkation. So anything higher than 6% on your federal loans is typically high. Anything low is typically — lower than that is typically pretty good. But if you have an average weighted interest rate of 5.8%, at a 10-year, that’s your default, a 10-year standard repayment, you can even today with the rates that are out there, you can beat 5.8%, so that’s where you would do an apples-to-apples comparison to a 10-year with a Credible or a CommonBond or something like that. You might get 4.9%. I’m just making up rates right now. So you would say, OK, better terms, lower payment, that type of thing. So to answer your question, do I think — so those are really the big differences. Now, the big thing to remember is that once you go from the federal to the private, there’s no going back. So that’s why a lot — I was kind of bemoaning the fact that people that have made that decision to say, “Thanks, federal government, it’s been real. Thanks for loaning me the money, I’m going to take it from here and go to a private company,” they’re kind of left in the dark a little bit because there’s no relief for them. So and they can’t go back. So they can’t say, “Psych. Just kidding. Takebacksies, let me go back to the federal government and get my relief.” So with regard to the rates, you know, rates are a little bit higher than they were a couple weeks ago. I would imagine that they’re going to come down. I think they’re going to have to just to be somewhat competitive with the government. But what the loan companies now are struggling with is not the fact that the fed has lower rates. It’s more about if I, Tim Ulbrich, if I let you refinance and now you’re making payments to me, the Baker Private Refi company, can I trust that you’re actually going to be employed to pay this back? And by the way, like I don’t have a huge cash reserve like the federal government that I can just rely on. So that’s why there was such a big flood of refis and these companies were like, whoa, like this is a problem and rates started to creep back up. And I think they’ll have to go back down just to incentivize, especially towards the end of that period, that September grace period, relief period, but yeah. So those are big, big differences we’re talking about. And sometimes those are used interchangeably, and they shouldn’t be. But a very common issue.

Drew: Awesome, guys. Should the student loan payments continue and just go 100% toward principal on the student loans during this time? Are federal Grad PLUS loans included?

Tim Baker: So the answer to the second question is yes. Grad PLUS loans are included. The answer to the first question is, typically no. So most of the time, if you are basically going through this strategy — if you selected your strategy appropriately, we’ll say, if you are in the federal system today, it’s really — the main reason is because you’re trying to seek some type of forgiveness option. So in that case, in that case, you should not pay a dollar more than you need to. The flag that you need to fly is you want to pay the least amount as humanly to maximize your forgiveness. So you’re going to take full advantage of that payment that would otherwise go there and basically direct that elsewhere.

Tim Ulbrich: And you get your forgiveness credit.

Tim Baker: Correct. Yeah, and get that month counted. Anytime that you can have basically a $0 payment, like a $0 interest payment, the math says basically money is a finite resource, use that money elsewhere. Now, this is kind of an emotional thing. Now, so the reason that I say most people that are in a federal payment is typically because they’re seeking forgiveness. You could be looking at me and saying, “Well, I’m in the federal program and I’m not seeking forgiveness.” So the reason I say that is because it makes sense from a math perspective to go outside — because of where rates have been for the last however many years — it makes sense to go out to a private company and get a better rate. Now, 10 years ago, a lot of these companies — like the student loan refi game was newer and when I was taught about student loans, you would never leave the federal system because the federal system, there’s a lot of these protections, forgive upon death and disability. But because of students loans are a $1.5 trillion issue, a lot of these companies have kind of risen to the same benefits that the federal government has. So now they can incentivize you to say, “Come over here and pay us the interest over the federal government.” So the question is should I pay the money back? I would say no unless your goal is to basically pay them off as quickly as possible. And if that’s true, then you probably should have refinanced years ago anyway. If that’s still true and you’re still in the federal system, I would say, yeah, you can pay it off. I would probably still direct that money elsewhere and then probably refinance because more than often, more often than not, you can get a better rate. Now, there are sometimes I come across loans that are like 2% and 3%. You know, if you are one of those people, don’t listen to me because I think you’re in the right spot. So if you are in a 2% or 3%, oftentimes, again, you’re like, alright, well I’d rather pay off my car loan that’s 5% or that credit card that I have that’s whatever percent. So those are some of the things you just have to weigh.

Tim Ulbrich: And if I could add to that, Tim, I think the only exception I think of here is if somebody knows themselves well enough that that money is going to be diverted elsewhere through kind of the typical lifestyle creep thing. If you know yourself well enough and you have that self-awareness, I think that might be the exception where you say, I’m going to keep making payments because momentum is really important. But the way I think about this is let’s say I’m making $1,500 a month payment let’s say on the standard default federal system. I think about that. If I didn’t have to make that payment, how would I best leverage $1,500 a month across my financial plan? And this is where we go back and we talk about this all the time on the podcast. So not just looking at one segment of your financial plan. So what does your emergency fund look like? What does the consumer debt look like? What investment opportunities exist? Are you not taking advantage of employer match in retirement, that type of situation? So you know, if you look at all those, more often than not I think what you’re really referring to is more often than not, if not almost always, you’re probably going to find an opportunity where that money could be leveraged elsewhere, at least for the short term when you have this 0% interest for six months.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I’ll give you an example. I was talking to a pharmacist in Washington. He’s married. He’s going for PSLF. I forget how much he’s paying per month. But he has a little ways to go with the emergency fund. He has a car — one of his car loans is 5-6%. So his question is, should I put money into the emergency fund? I’m like, yes, and probably focus on the car loan. And you know, if you think about it, these loan payments can be 8 — and especially if you’re married — it can be thousands and thousands of dollars. I mean, one, two, three months of that can go huge right into an emergency fund. Like I think about how much money my wife and I basically save into our Ally accounts for different purposes. You know, it’s about $1,500 a month after we’re putting money into 401ks and IRAs and things like that, 529 accounts for our kids. But you know, it’s going into our Mexico fund or it’s going into our home maintenance fund or whatever that looks like. But if I could basically double that for this amount of months, like that would be awesome. And then the other side of that is once you have your savings plan in place, that’s when you can really get dangerous with your investments. And sometimes we put the cart before the horse. So I work with a lot of pharmacists that are like credit card debt, student loan payments are kind of all over the place, and then they have like a Robinhood account. And I get — I know why we do that. It’s because we’re interested and we want to learn about investments, but those are — we’re three or four steps ahead where we probably shouldn’t be directing money into a taxable account. We should be focused on some of these steps 1-8 type of thing. So.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. So Drew, I think we have time for probably one more question before we wrap up for the evening.

Drew: Awesome. So guys, for future borrowers of federal loans, do you think the interest rate will be higher after COVID-19 to make up for money lost?

Tim Ulbrich: Ooh, that’s a good question. You know, how will this get paid back and what impact will that have on future interest rates on federal loans? What do you think, Tim?

Tim Baker: I don’t think so. You know, I think rates for student loans have been pretty high with regard to like the federal side of things. That’s not uncommon for me to see. I mean, back — you know, if I’m working with people in their 40s and 50s, sometimes they have loans that are like 2% and I’m like, this is awesome. Because most of the time, I see 20-somethings, 30-somethings, that could be north of 7% for federal loans. And for pharmacists, those Grad PLUS loans, those add up. So and I think there is a little bit of a cry of like the government profiting on the backs of students, that type of thing. It is an unsecured debt, but it doesn’t ever go away. So like you can’t discharge student debt in bankruptcy, so it’s pretty secure in terms of like if you have student loans and you’re collecting social security, they’ll garnish that stuff. So that’s one of the problems with student loans is you can’t get away from them. So I don’t know if we see a big spike in rates after the fact. I mean, I could see the opposite, that they keep them low. But you know, who knows? You know, who knows what’s going to happen? We could see kind of a action-reaction type of thing with regard to that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think it’s a really good question. You know, this reminds me to a talking point when we talk about PSLF. We need to remember that this is a — student loans are $1.5 trillion problem that are gaining a lot of momentum politically. And if you’ve watched any of the debates this season, this is an indicator as well as what we saw as the support in the CARES Act, I think we’re going to see more of that going through the election year. So you know, in theory, of course they could. But I don’t think it’s a very popular decision right now for a lot of the flack that they take in in terms of the rising student loan debt and the impact interest rates have had. So too soon to say, but I certainly don’t think it would be a popular decision.

Tim Baker: Yeah, but I mean, but to play devil’s advocate on the other side of the aisle is you know, with Trump, he’s basically proposing to get rid of it, which again, I saw some questions get in, come in like hey, is this really a viable thing? And I think the answer is still yes despite that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: Because I still bet on the status quo versus a big change. And that’s either for like mass forgiveness or elimination. So it’s another issue where our country is very, very polarized over one issue. So but I think, again, to kind of reassure the PSLF-ers out there is that every — basically when this was enacted by President George W. Bush in 2007, every president and Congress since then has talked about getting rid of it or capping it. And it’s still here. And all of the documents and legislation, proposed legislation, to do this talks about future borrowers. So if you’re a student and you’re going to graduate in 2022, I don’t know. Maybe it will be there, maybe it won’t. But if you’re a year into PSLF and you’re in the program and you’re basically filled out the employment certification form, I think that you’re going to be fine. I would imagine if and when they ever do get rid of this, let’s pretend it’s January 1, 2025, then those people that are going to be into it — so if you’re in it December 31, 2024, your loans are going to be forgiven basically 10 years from then, essentially is what the thought is. So I think at least it’ll be grandfathered in. But the press on it is terrible. But I think it will get better.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I agree. And for those that want to learn more about this topic, we’ve covered it on the podcast a few different times. Episode 018, we talked about the benefits of PSLF. 078, we talked about is it a waste? And that was when the news had come out about 99% of borrowers or applicants of PSLF being denied. And then 114, most recently, we talked about the presidential candidates at the time predominantly was Elizabeth Warren and Bernie Sanders’ take on debt cancellation and forgiveness. So for those that had a question this evening that we did not get to, couple options I would throw out to you. One, if you aren’t already with us in the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, I hope you’ll join there. We’ve got a community that’s very active and responsive. You can throw your question out there. As well as we have a weekly segment we do on the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast called Ask a YFP CFP where we do just like we’re doing here, question from a member of our community teed up for Tim Baker, our financial planner, to answer that question. You can submit your question by going to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/askYFP. So thank you so much to everybody who attended. Really, really appreciate your engagement throughout the evening. I appreciate you all taking the time to come onto the webinar tonight. I want to thank Tim Baker again for his time as well, as well as APhA for making this session possible. Have a great rest of your evening.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]